unfoldingWord_en_tn/tn_JOS.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	syt5				0	# Introduction to Joshua\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Joshua\n\n**The conquest of the land of Canaan**\n\na. Preparations\n* Yahweh encourages Joshua (1:1–9)\n* The eastern tribes send their armies (1:10–16)\n* Joshua sends spies to Jericho (2:1–24)\n* The Israelites cross the Jordan River (3:1–5:1)\n* The Israelites are circumcised and celebrate Passover (5:2–12)\n\nb. Fight against kings in the center of the land\n* The fight against Jericho (5:13–6:27)\n* The fight against Ai (7:1–8:29)\n\nc. The Israelites affirm the covenant at Mount Ebal (8:30–35)\n\nd. Fight against the kings in the south of the land\n* The fight at Gibeon (9:1–10:27)\n* The fights against Makkedah, Libnah, Lachish, Eglon, Hebron, and Debir (10:28–43)\n\ne. Fight against the kings in the north of the land\n* The fight at Merom (11:1–23)\n\n**The division of the land of Canaan**\n\na. Summary of kings defeated and land remaining to conquer (12:1–13:7)\n\nb. Assignment of land east of the Jordan River\n* Reuben, Gad, east Manasseh (13:8–32)\n\nc. Assignment of land west of the Jordan River\n* Major tribes: Judah, Ephraim, west Manasseh (14:1–17:18)\n* Remaining tribes: Benjamin, Simeon, Zebulun, Issachar, Asher, Naphtali, Dan (18:1–19:51)\n\nd. Cities of refuge and Levite cities (20:1–21:45)\n\n**Concluding episodes**\n\n* The eastern tribes return home and build an altar (22:1–34)\n* The Israelites renew the covenant at Shechem (23:1–24:28)\n* The death of Joshua (24:29–33)\n\n### What is the book of Joshua about?\n\nThe book of Joshua is about the Israelites entering and occupying the land of Canaan. Joshua was the leader who replaced Moses. He led the Israelites as they fought against the people groups that had been living in Canaan. This book then tells how the Israelites divided the land among the twelve tribes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Joshua?\n\nThe book does not tell us who wrote it. However, some verses in the book indicate that Joshua may have written at least part of it. Since ancient times, the Jewish people have thought that Joshua recorded much of what is in this book.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThis book has traditionally had the title “Joshua” because it tells how Joshua led the people of Israel. Translators may create a title such as “The Book About When Joshua Led Israel.” Translators should avoid a title that suggests that Joshua was the writer of the book, as it is not certain exactly how much of it he may have written.\n\n### When should Joshua be translated?\n\nThe book of Joshua should probably be translated after Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy. This is because the historical events described in the book of Joshua may be more difficult understand to without the information in those previous books.\n\n## Part 2: Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Book\n\n### The term “devoted”\nThe book uses a term in chapters 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, and 22 that the ULT translates as “devoted.” This was a specialized term that described the cultural practice of giving something over to Yahweh so that humans would no longer be able to use it. Depending on the context, the term can indicate either “destroy” or “preserve but set apart.” The context must determine the meaning, so be sensitive to the context as you translate this term.\n\n## Part 3: Translation Issues in This Book\n\n### “to the mouth of the sword”\nThe author often uses this expression in connection with the term “devoted.” It was a common expression of his culture that referred to destroying something completely. When it appears, as it does about a dozen times in the book, it helps clarify what the term “devoted” means in a specific context. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n\n### “And it happened” \nThe author often uses the phrase “And it happened” to introduce new event in the story or a new development within an episode. To translate this phrase in its various occurrences, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event or development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])\n\n### “unto this day”\nThe author used this phrase to refer to the time when he was writing. The translator should be aware that “to this day” refers to a time that is already past. He must avoid giving the impression to his readers that “to this day” means “to the present day.” The translator might decide to use an equivalent phrase such as “at the time of this writing.” This phrase occurs in Joshua 4:9, 5:9, 6:25, 7:26, 8:28, 29, 10:27, 13:13, 14:14, 15:63, and 16:10.\n\n### “And now” \nCharacters in the story who are making a speech or delivering a message often use the phrase “And now” to introduce their main point. That point typically relates to what they want their listeners to do in response to what they have said so far. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. For example, you might say something such as “now here is my main point” or “now here is what I want you to do.” This phrase occurs in Joshua 1:2, 2:12, 3:12, 9:6, 9:11, 9:12, 9:23, 9:25, 13:7, 14:10, 14:12, 22:4, 24:14, and 24:23. \n\n### “hear” and “listen”\nThe author and characters sometimes use the words “hear” and “listen” in a specialized sense to mean someone complying with what they have heard or listened to someone saying. When these words refer to a person, they have the sense of “obey.” When they apply to God, they indicate that God did what someone asked him to do, so you might say that God “answered” that person’s prayer. At other times, these words have a more literal sense of sound registering in the ears, that is, of a person taking in and understanding information. Be sensitive to the meaning of these words in the context as you translate them.\n\n### Name of tribe or nation representing its people or army\nThe author and characters often use the name of a nation or Israelite tribe to mean its people or its army. It may sound as if an individual with that name is doing an action, but it is actually a group of people descended from that individual. Once you are aware of this usage, the meaning should be evident from the context. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### “the sons of”\nSimilarly, the author and characters often use the expression “the sons of” to mean the people or army of a nation or Israelite tribe descended from the individual who is then named. They do not mean only the literal, first-generation male descendants of that person. Once you are aware of this usage, the meaning should be evident from the context. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “to the face of”\nThe author and characters often use the expression “to the face of” to mean “before,” “in front of,” or “in the presence of” a person or thing. This is by association with the way one can see the face of a person who is present and the way people typically face forward, toward what is before or in front of them. This usage occurs very frequently in the book, about 60 times, and accounts for almost every instance of the word “face.” Only in 5:14 and 7:6 does the word refer literally to part of the body, where Joshua bows down with his face to the ground. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### “all of Israel”\nThis phrase appears sixteen times in the Book of Joshua, but it does not always mean every single person in the nation of Israel. Often it means the Israelite army. At other times it refers to representatives of the twelve tribes of Israel. In still other passages, it probably means a large number of the people in the nation of Israel. However, in a few contexts it does seem to indicate every Israelite, as when Yahweh tells Joshua in 3:7, “This day I will begin to make you great in the eyes of all of Israel, who will know that just as I was with Moses, I am with you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])\n\n## Part 4: Specific Translation Issues in Chapters 13–21\n\nThere are some specific translation issues in the section of the book that describes the territories of the Israelite tribes and their borders.\n\n### “inheritance”\nThe author uses the idea of “inheritance” by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### “went up,” “went down”\nIn Hebrew, writers and speakers generally indicated whether people were going up to a higher elevation or going down to a lower elevation when they traveled. Such expressions occur frequently in the descriptions of tribal borders. If your language does not mark travel for change in elevation, you can translate such expressions more simply. For example, you could just say “went” instead of “went up” or “went down.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### “from” a direction “to” a place\nThe author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. For example, speaking of the territory of Naphtali, he describes the territory of Asher as being “from the west” relative to it, meaning that someone would be coming from the west to go from Asher to Naphtali. In your translation, express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. For example, you might say instead that Asher was “to the west” of Naphtali. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n\n### “the sea”\nWhen the author says “the sea,” he means the Mediterranean Sea. He calls it the Great Sea when he gives it a name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### “seaward”\nThe author uses the term **seaward** by association to mean toward the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, to the west. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### “toward the sunrise,” “from the sunrise”\nThe author uses the term **sunrise** by association to mean the direction where the sun rises, that is, the east. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Names in border descriptions\nAll names in border descriptions are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n
3	1:intro	r7gc				0	# Joshua 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes the Israelites’ preparations for the conquest of the land of Canaan.\n* Yahweh encourages Joshua (1:1–9)\n* The eastern tribes send their armies (1:10–16)\n\nAt the start of the book of Joshua, the biblical narrative continues naturally from the end of the book of Deuteronomy.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “Be strong and courageous”\nYahweh tells Joshua in verses 6, 7 and 9 to “be strong and courageous,” and the leaders of the eastern tribes tell him the same thing in verse 18. The words “strong” and “courageous” mean similar things. Yahweh and the tribal leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. Joshua needs to act with great courage, but if he does, Yahweh will give him victory and honor him. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase, but you should translate this expression the same way each time so that your readers will recognize its importance in this part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])\n\n### “you” and “your” \nThe words “you” and “your” are plural in vv. 2–3 because Yahweh is speaking about the Israelites. They are singular in vv. 2–9 because Yahweh is speaking to Joshua. They are plural in vv. 11–15 because groups are being addressed. They are singular in vv. 16–18 because the tribal leaders are speaking to Joshua.\n\n\n\n
4	1:1	s8u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
5	1:1	eka2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	נ֔וּן	1	The word **Nun** is the name of a man, Joshua’s father.
6	1:2	le23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	וְ⁠עַתָּה֩	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the phrase translated as **And now** is an expression that people of this time used to introduce the main business of a message. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use it in your translation, here and for the other instances of this expression in the book. Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
7	1:2	xugz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ק֨וּם	1	Yahweh is using the expression **arise** to tell Joshua to take action and lead the Israelites across the Jordan River to begin the conquest of Canaan. He is not telling him to get out of bed or stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “get going”
8	1:2	o0hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and in many places throughout the book, **sons** means “descendants,” so the phrase **sons of** is describing a people group. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel”
9	1:2	ragw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	לָ⁠הֶ֖ם לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	Since Joshua is one of the **sons of Israel**, Yahweh is referring to him in the third person when he says **them**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could have Yahweh refer to him in the second person. This would indicate explicitly that Joshua is included in this promise. Alternate translation: “to you and the rest of the sons of Israel” or “to you and all of the other people of Israel”
10	1:3	t94e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	כָּל־מָק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר תִּדְרֹ֧ךְ כַּֽף־רַגְלְ⁠כֶ֛ם בּ֖⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh is using part of each of the Israelites, **the sole of your foot**, to represent the people of Israel themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Every place that you will tread upon”
11	1:3	xjc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	רַגְלְ⁠כֶ֛ם…לָ⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Here, the words **your** and **you** are plural and refer to Joshua and all the other Israelite people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form of **foot** and to indicate specifically that **you** is plural. Alternate translation: “your feet … to all of you”
12	1:3	v1l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	לָ⁠כֶ֣ם נְתַתִּ֑י⁠ו	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will give it to you” or “I will certainly give it to you”
13	1:4	xqnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠נָּהָ֧ר הַ⁠גָּד֣וֹל נְהַר־ פְּרָ֗ת	1	The phrase **the Great River** is another name for **the Euphrates River**. Alternate translation: “the Great River, that is, the Euphrates River”
14	1:4	nffx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠יָּ֥ם הַ⁠גָּד֖וֹל	1	The phrase **the Great Sea** is another name for the Mediterranean Sea. You could clarify that for your readers if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the Great Sea, that is, the Mediterranean Sea”
15	1:4	pust		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	מְב֣וֹא הַ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶשׁ	1	Yahweh is using **the going of the sun**, that is, the sunset, by association to mean the west, since the sun sets in the west. Alternate translation: “in the west”
16	1:4	nbe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	גְּבוּלְ⁠כֶֽם	1	Here, the word **your** is plural and refers to the tribes of Israel and includes Joshua. Alternate translation: “the territory of you Israelites”
17	1:5	l58e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לֹֽא & אִישׁ֙	1	Since the book of Joshua describes how the kings of cities and kingdoms led their soldiers into battle to oppose Joshua, the phrase **No man** seems implicitly to mean “No king and his army” or more broadly “No people group.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No king and his army” or “No people group.”
18	1:5	rk2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יִתְיַצֵּ֥ב & לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	In this context, the word **stand** means “resist” or “withstand.” The phrase **to your face** either means “in front of you,” with **face** meaning by association the area in front of Joshua, or “against you,” with part of Joshua, his **face**, representing all of him. You could indicate this overall meaning explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “will be able to resist you”
19	1:5	w48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ & חַיֶּ֑י⁠ךָ & עִמָּ֔⁠ךְ & אַרְפְּ⁠ךָ֖ & אֶעֶזְבֶֽ⁠ךָּ	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the words **you** and **your** are singular in this verse and through verse 9, since they refer to Joshua. So use singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
20	1:5	iq2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	לֹ֥א אַרְפְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠לֹ֥א אֶעֶזְבֶֽ⁠ךָּ	1	The words **abandon** and **leave** mean basically the same thing. Yahweh combines them to emphasize that he will not do these things. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. It may be more natural in your language to use a positive statement to do that. Alternate translation: “I will not ever abandon you” or “I will certainly stay with you always”
21	1:6	a5yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֖ק וֶ⁠אֱמָ֑ץ	1	The phrases **Be strong** and **be courageous** mean similar things. Yahweh is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Be very courageous”
22	1:6	gn34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לַ⁠אֲבוֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	Here, **fathers** means “ancestors” and refers specifically to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their forefathers” or “to their forefathers Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob”
23	1:7	xle4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֨ק וֶֽ⁠אֱמַ֜ץ מְאֹ֗ד	1	These are the same two phrases that occurred in the previous verse, except the word **very** is added here for increased emphasis. See how you translated the phrase “Be strong and be courageous” in the previous verse and consider how you might add even more emphasis here. Alternate translation: “Be entirely courageous”
24	1:7	fi6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אַל־תָּס֥וּר מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ	1	Yahweh is speaking as if **the law that Moses … commanded** were literally a road that Joshua was walking on and as if Joshua might **turn aside from** it and walk on a different path. He means that Joshua must not stop living in the manner in which God commanded in the law. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stop obeying it”
25	1:7	db9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	יָמִ֣ין וּ⁠שְׂמֹ֑אול	1	Yahweh is speaking of two things in order to mean them and everything in between. Continuing the image of the road, he means that Joshua should not go off the road in any direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in any way”
26	1:8	g4qg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֹֽא־יָמ֡וּשׁ סֵפֶר֩ הַ⁠תּוֹרָ֨ה הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה מִ⁠פִּ֗י⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is using the phrase **shall not depart from your mouth** by association to mean that Joshua must continually read the **book of the law**, since people at this time read out loud, even when reading alone, so Joshua would use his mouth to form the words as he read. (However, this is not a command to read only alone. It envisions that Joshua might at times read the law aloud to the people of Israel.) Alternate translation: “You shall not stop reading this book of the law”
27	1:8	vu2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	יוֹמָ֣ם וָ⁠לַ֔יְלָה	1	Yahweh is referring to the two main components of time, **day** and **night**, to mean “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually”
28	1:8	lcs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	תַּצְלִ֥יחַ אֶת־דְּרָכֶ֖⁠ךָ וְ⁠אָ֥ז תַּשְׂכִּֽיל	1	The phrases **you will make your ways prosperous** and **you will succeed** mean similar things. Yahweh is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you will assuredly be successful”
29	1:8	k618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	תַּצְלִ֥יחַ אֶת־ דְּרָכֶ֖⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is speaking of Joshua’s **ways** as if they were a living thing that Joshua could **make … prosperous**. Yahweh is speaking of Joshua’s actions as if they were **ways** or roads that he was walking on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will prosper in what you do”
30	1:9	vt4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֤וֹא צִוִּיתִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	Yahweh is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “ “Surely I have commanded you!”
31	1:9	fnz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲזַ֣ק וֶ⁠אֱמָ֔ץ	1	See how you translated these same phrases in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “Be very courageous”
32	1:9	vwe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַֽל־ תַּעֲרֹ֖ץ וְ⁠אַל־ תֵּחָ֑ת כִּ֤י עִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֔י⁠ךָ בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר תֵּלֵֽךְ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since Yahweh your God is with you in every place where you go, do not be terrified and do not be dismayed”
33	1:9	u820		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אַֽל־תַּעֲרֹ֖ץ וְ⁠אַל־תֵּחָ֑ת	1	The phrases **Do not be terrified** and **do not be dismayed** mean similar things. Yahweh combines them to emphasize that Joshua must not be afraid. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Make sure that you are not terrified” or “There is absolutely no reason for you to be terrified”
34	1:9	f8qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	עִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	Here Yahweh speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh your God, am with you”
35	1:11	f3rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠צַוּ֤וּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עָם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הָכִ֥ינוּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם צֵידָ֑ה כִּ֞י בְּ⁠ע֣וֹד ׀ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים אַתֶּם֙ עֹֽבְרִים֙ אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֣ן הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ לָ⁠רֶ֣שֶׁת אֶת־ הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁר֙ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֔ם נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠רִשְׁתָּֽ⁠הּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “command the people to prepare provisions for themselves because within three days they will be crossing over this Jordan to enter to possess the land that Yahweh their God is giving to them to possess it” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “command the people to pepare provisions for themselves because within three days they will be crossing over this Jordan to enter to possess the land that Yahweh their God is giving to them to possess it”
36	1:11	ck8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠ע֣וֹד׀ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים	1	Here Joshua was counting the current day as day one. This was the way that Jewish people counted days. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in two days from now” or “on the day after tomorrow”
37	1:13	dgxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	זָכוֹר֙ אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁ֨ר	1	Joshua did not think that the people from these three tribes had forgotten what Moses had instructed them. Rather, he is using the word **Remember** to cause them to pay attention to what he is going to say next. If you would not use the word **Remember** for this purpose you could use an equivalent expression or indicate the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You know the word that” or “You remember the word that” or “Keep in mind the word that”
38	1:13	ylv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר	1	Here, **word** represents what Moses had said to Joshua using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the instructions” or “the words”
39	1:13	jquc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	אֶתְ⁠כֶ֛ם…אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶם֙…לָ⁠כֶ֔ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם	1	Every occurrence of the words **your** and **you** in this verse are plural and refer to Joshua and the Israelites.
40	1:13	l5qn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מֵנִ֣יחַ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The phrase **give rest** is an idiom that refers to living peacefully and settling down in the land after Israel defeated its enemies. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cause you to live peacefully”
41	1:14	vefn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מִקְנֵי⁠כֶם֒	1	Here, the word translated as **livestock** refers to cows, sheep, and goats. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and your cows and sheep and goats”
42	1:14	ennq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עֵ֣בֶר הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	Joshua is describing this **land** from the perspective of the land that Yahweh originally promised to the Israelites west of the Jordan. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan”
43	1:14	d575		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲחֵי⁠כֶ֗ם	1	Here, the word **brothers** means “fellow Israelites” and refers to the Israelites from the other tribes of Israel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your fellow Israelites”
44	1:14	rk3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	The phrase **the mighty men of valor** refers to the men who were fighting age, over 20 years old. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the men of fighting age”
45	1:14	u212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **valor**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the mighty men who are valiant”
46	1:15	b5yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁר־יָנִ֨יחַ & לַֽ⁠אֲחֵי⁠כֶם֮	1	The phrase **gives rest** refers to living peacefully and settling down in the land after Israel defeated its enemies. It has the same meaning as the phrase **give rest** in [1:13](../01/13.md). See how you translated that phrase there.
47	1:15	f85b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לַֽ⁠אֲחֵי⁠כֶם֮	1	See how you translated the word **brothers** in the previous verse where it is used with the same meaning.
48	1:18	zhz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	כָּל־אִ֞ישׁ	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, the Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh are using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “Every person”
49	1:18	rel4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	כָּל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־יַמְרֶ֣ה אֶת־פִּ֗י⁠ךָ וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִשְׁמַ֧ע אֶת־דְּבָרֶ֛י⁠ךָ לְ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־תְּצַוֶּ֖⁠נּוּ יוּמָ֑ת	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that any form of disobedience will be punished. The phrase **rebels against your mouth** and the phrase **will not hear your words** mean basically the same thing. The Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh are the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that they will **put to death** anyone who rebels against what Joshua commands. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We will surely put to death every man who rebels against what you instruct us to do”
50	1:18	mxi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	יַמְרֶ֣ה אֶת־פִּ֗י⁠ךָ וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִשְׁמַ֧ע אֶת־דְּבָרֶ֛י⁠ךָ	1	The speakers are using the words **mouth** and **words** and associating them with the instructions or commands that Joshua would speak with his **mouth** using **words**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use equivalent expressions or use plain language. Alternate translation: “rebels against your commands and will not hear your instructions”
51	1:18	lbc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יוּמָ֑ת	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context implies indicates that the Reubenites, the Gadites, and the half-tribe of Manasseh will do it. Alternate translation: “we will put to death”
52	1:18	m66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	יוּמָ֑ת	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea with an active verb or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we will kill”
53	1:18	zez7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	חֲזַ֥ק וֶ⁠אֱמָֽץ	1	See how you translated the phrase **be strong and be courageous** in [1:6](../01/06.md).
54	2:intro	vg4m				0	# Joshua 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the story of the conquest of the land of Canaan by describing how Joshua sends spies to investigate the situation in the city of Jericho.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Rahab’s faith\nEven though Rahab was a Canaanite, she expressed her faith in Yahweh, the God of Israel. The statement “for Yahweh your God, he is God in heaven above and on the earth below” is an expression of her faith. Because Rahab recognized Yahweh as the true God, she helped the Israelites, and as a result, they spared her and her family. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n
55	2:1	w886		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠שִּׁטִּ֞ים	1	This is the name of a place on the east side of the Jordan River. It means “acacia trees.”
56	2:1	ig8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	אִשָּׁ֥ה זוֹנָ֛ה וּ⁠שְׁמָ֥⁠הּ רָחָ֖ב	1	The author is using the phrase **a woman, a prostitute** to introduce **Rahab** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain woman named Rahab, who was a prostitute”
57	2:1	z78b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	רָחָ֖ב	1	**Rahab** is the name of a woman.
58	2:2	y177		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יֵּ֣אָמַ֔ר לְ⁠מֶ֥לֶךְ יְרִיח֖וֹ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And someone told the king of Jericho”
59	2:2	axiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	הִנֵּ֣ה	1	The person addressing **the king** is speaking as if he wants him to look at something, but he is actually using the term **Behold** to focus attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
60	2:3	xz7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ה֠וֹצִיאִי הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֨ים הַ⁠בָּאִ֤ים אֵלַ֨יִ⁠ךְ֙ אֲשֶׁר־ בָּ֣אוּ לְ⁠בֵיתֵ֔⁠ךְ כִּ֛י לַ⁠חְפֹּ֥ר אֶת־ כָּל־ הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ בָּֽאוּ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since the men who came to you, who came to your house, have come to search out all the land, brint them out”
61	2:5	ty4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יְהִ֨י הַ⁠שַּׁ֜עַר לִ⁠סְגּ֗וֹר	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action you can indicate that “men” did it. Alternate translation: “And men shut the gate”
62	2:5	o0r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	רִדְפ֥וּ מַהֵ֛ר אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ֥י תַשִּׂיגֽוּ⁠ם	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you might still overtake them, pursue quickly after them”
63	2:6	l5zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וְ⁠הִ֖יא הֶעֱלָ֣תַ⁠ם הַ⁠גָּ֑גָ⁠ה וַֽ⁠תִּטְמְנֵ⁠ם֙ בְּ⁠פִשְׁתֵּ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ הָ⁠עֲרֻכ֥וֹת לָ֖⁠הּ עַל־הַ⁠גָּֽג	1	The author is providing this background information to explain how Rahab had hidden the men, as described in [2:4](../02/04.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information.
64	2:6	st56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠גָּ֑גָ⁠ה	1	The **roof** was flat and strong, so people could walk around on it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that the roof was flat. The UST models one way to do this.
65	2:6	b99c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	בְּ⁠פִשְׁתֵּ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ	1	The word **flax** refers to a plant that is grown for its fibers, which is used in making cloth. It has tall, slender stalks that can tied into bundles. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in the long stalks of a plant”
66	2:6	j012		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הָ⁠עֲרֻכ֥וֹת לָ֖⁠הּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that she had arranged”
67	2:7	p4sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַֽ⁠מַּעְבְּר֑וֹת	1	The word **fords** describes places where a river or other body of water is shallow enough for people to get to the other side by walking through it. If you do not have a term to describe this type of place, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the crossings”
68	2:7	j013		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וְ⁠הַ⁠שַּׁ֣עַר סָגָ֔רוּ	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “And the gate was shut”
69	2:8	ds5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	עָלְתָ֥ה	1	Your language might say “came up” rather than **went up** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “came up”
70	2:9	t8zy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	יָדַ֕עְתִּי כִּֽי־נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	Here, the word **you** is plural and refers to all the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “I know that Yahweh has given the land to you Israelites”
71	2:9	xr6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָפְלָ֤ה אֵֽימַתְ⁠כֶם֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	Rahab is speaking as if **dread** or fear of the Israelites had actually **fallen** on the people of Jericho and Canaan. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have become terrified of you”
72	2:9	u74z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	נָמֹ֛גוּ & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Rahab is speaking as if the people of Jericho and Canaan had actually **melted** in front of or in the presence of the Israelites. The implication is that they will not be able to resist them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not be able to resist you”
73	2:10	c6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֜י	1	Rahab is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. She means the Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
74	2:10	x2n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶחֱרַמְתֶּ֖ם אוֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	See the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua of the term that is translated as **devoted** here. In this context, the term refers to complete destruction. Alternate translation: “that you completely destroyed them”
75	2:11	sdem		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבֵ֔⁠נוּ	1	Since Rahab is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “and our hearts have melted”
76	2:11	qx6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבֵ֔⁠נוּ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:9](../02/09.md). (Your language may use a different part of the body than the **heart** to represent a person’s thoughts and emotions. If so, you can use that in your translation.) Alternate translation: “and in our hearts, we have become very afraid”
77	2:11	j014		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠לֹא־ קָ֨מָה ע֥וֹד ר֛וּחַ בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “and the spirit in a man is no longer able to resist you”
78	2:11	j015		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠לֹא־ קָ֨מָה ע֥וֹד ר֛וּחַ בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	Rahab is using one part of a person, his **spirit**, to mean all of him in the act of resisting or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and no man is able to resist you any longer”
79	2:11	agqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּ⁠אִ֖ישׁ	1	Although the term **man** is masculine, Rahab is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “in a person”
80	2:11	m728		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֣יִם מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וְ⁠עַל־ הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּֽחַת	1	Rahab is using the two major components of creation to mean all of creation itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “over all of creation”
81	2:12	e659		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
82	2:12	nmi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	עָשִׂ֥יתִי עִמָּ⁠כֶ֖ם חָ֑סֶד וַ⁠עֲשִׂיתֶ֨ם גַּם־אַתֶּ֜ם עִם־בֵּ֤ית אָבִ⁠י֙ חֶ֔סֶד	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am acting kindly toward you, swear to me that you yourselves will also act kindly toward the house of my father”
83	2:12	iw4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בֵּ֤ית אָבִ⁠י֙	1	Rahab is not using the expression **the house of my father** to refer to the building in which her father lives. As the next verse indicates, the expression means her extended family, which included her parents, her siblings, and their spouses and children. Alternate translation: “the household of my father” or “my extended family”
84	2:12	rlef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	א֥וֹת אֱמֶֽת	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. (This **sign** turns out to be the scarlet cord that the spies give Rahab in [2:18](../02/18.md).) Alternate translation: “a sign that you will truly do what you promise”
85	2:13	m6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	⁠הִצַּלְתֶּ֥ם אֶת־נַפְשֹׁתֵ֖י⁠נוּ מִ⁠מָּֽוֶת	1	Rahab is speaking as if **death** itself were threatening the **lives** of her family so the spies needed to **deliver** or rescue them from it. She is using **death** to represent the Israelite army, which was about to enter Canaan and kill its inhabitants If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you will not let your fellow Israelites kill us”
86	2:14	yb7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	נַפְשֵׁ֤⁠נוּ תַחְתֵּי⁠כֶם֙ לָ⁠מ֔וּת	1	This is an oath formula in which the two spies are promising to give their lives (allow themselves to be killed) if they do not keep their promise and spare the lives of Rahab and her families when the Israelites conquer Jericho and kill its inhabitants. Alternate translation: “If we do not do what we promise, may Yahweh take our lives” or “If you and your family are killed when we conquer Jericho, may Yahweh kill us as well”
87	2:14	ji8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	תַחְתֵּי⁠כֶם֙	1	The word **yours** is plural and refers to Rahab and her family. Alternate translation: “in place of the lives of you and your family”
88	2:14	ja4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥ינוּ עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **kindness** and **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas with adjectives or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we will act kindly and faithfully towards you”
89	2:14	af54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥ינוּ עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The terms **kindness** and **faithfulness** mean similar things. The spies are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “then we will surely deal kindly with you” or “then we will surely act faithfully toward you”
90	2:15	oa1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וַ⁠תּוֹרִדֵ֥⁠ם בַּ⁠חֶ֖בֶל בְּעַ֣ד הַֽ⁠חַלּ֑וֹן	1	The author is describing an event before describing other events that preceded it. This actually occurred after Rahab spoke her final words to the spies in [2:21](../02/21.md). In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they happened and put the information in this verse after the quotation from Rahab in [2:21](../02/21.md). Alternatively, you could indicate that what the author says here anticipates what happens a little later in the story. Alternate translation: “Then she agreed to lower them down by a rope through the window”
91	2:15	apx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	כִּ֤י בֵיתָ⁠הּ֙ בְּ⁠קִ֣יר הַֽ⁠חוֹמָ֔ה וּ⁠בַֽ⁠חוֹמָ֖ה הִ֥יא יוֹשָֽׁבֶת	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand what happens in the story. Because Rahab’s house was built into the city wall, she was able to let the spies out a window and lower them down to the ground outside the city wall. That way they were able to escape from the city even though the gates had been shut. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
92	2:16	y7a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֗ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Alternate translation: “until the day after tomorrow”
93	2:17	dmh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נְקִיִּ֣ם אֲנַ֔חְנוּ מִ⁠שְּׁבֻעָתֵ֥⁠ךְ הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הִשְׁבַּעְתָּֽ⁠נוּ	1	The spies are implicitly introducing the conditions that Rahab and her family must meet in order for their lives to be spared. If they do not meet these conditions, then the spies will be **innocent**, that is, not guilty of breaking their **oath**, if Rahab and her family are killed. Alternate translation: “We will be innocent from this oath of yours that you have made us swear if you do not meet the following conditions”
94	2:18	z8uo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הִנֵּ֛ה אֲנַ֥חְנוּ בָאִ֖ים	1	The spies are using a common expression that means that they were about to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Now we are about to come”
95	2:18	e4iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	אֶת־ תִּקְוַ֡ת חוּט֩ הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה	1	The word **scarlet** describes a bright red color. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this bright-red woven cord”
96	2:18	yscl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בֵּ֣ית אָבִ֔י⁠ךְ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:12](../01/12.md). Alternate translation: “the household of your father” or “your extended family”
97	2:19	vdc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	וְ⁠הָיָ֡ה כֹּ֣ל אֲשֶׁר־יֵצֵא֩ מִ⁠דַּלְתֵ֨י בֵיתֵ֧⁠ךְ ׀ הַ⁠ח֛וּצָ⁠ה דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ נְקִיִּ֑ם וְ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִֽהְיֶ֤ה אִתָּ⁠ךְ֙ בַּ⁠בַּ֔יִת דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ אִם־יָ֖ד תִּֽהְיֶה־בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	The spies are saying what would happen in the case of two different possibilities. They are describing what second event would follow a first event in each case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a connecting word before the second event. Alternate translation: “Now suppose someone goes out from the doors of your house to the outside and is killed. Then his blood will be on his head, and we will be innocent. But suppose someone stays with you in the house. Then his blood will be on our heads if a hand is laid on him”
98	2:19	j016		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠דַּלְתֵ֨י בֵיתֵ֧⁠ךְ	1	The spies are using one part of Rahab’s house, its **doors**, to mean all it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside your house”
99	2:19	k27w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ & דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	The spies are using the term **blood** by association to mean “death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “his death will be on his head … his death will be on our head”
100	2:19	yrzq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	דָּמ֥⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ & דָּמ֣⁠וֹ בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	The spies are using a common expression that means that someone was morally and legally responsible for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will be responsible for his own death … we will be responsible for his death”
101	2:19	giu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	בְ⁠רֹאשֵׁ֔⁠נוּ	1	Since the spies are referring to themselves, and there are two of them, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “on our heads”
102	2:19	qg47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יָ֖ד תִּֽהְיֶה־בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	The spies are using the expression **a hand shall be upon** to mean that someone would be injured or harmed. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “anyone harms that person”
103	2:21	uxw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כְּ⁠דִבְרֵי⁠כֶ֣ם כֶּן־ה֔וּא	1	This expression indicates that Rahab agreed to the men’s terms of the oath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I agree with these conditions”
104	2:21	gjr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּ⁠דִבְרֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Rahab is using the term **words** by association to mean what the spies said by using words. Alternate translation: “According to what you have said”
105	2:23	cv1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אֵ֥ת כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּצְא֖וֹת אוֹתָֽ⁠ם	1	The author is speaking of what the spies saw and experienced as they investigated Jericho as if those were living thing that could have **found** them. (The author is making a play on words; in the previous verse, the pursuers did not “find” the spies; instead, exciting and encouraging things **found** them as they explored the land.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that they had seen and experienced”
106	2:24	avki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	The two spies are using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. They are doing that to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will give all of the land into our hand”
107	2:24	tsz0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	In this expression, having something in one’s **hand** represents by association possessing it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh has given us possession of all of the land” or “Yahweh will enable us to conquer all of the land”
108	2:24	eh7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נָמֹ֛גוּ כָּל־ יֹשְׁבֵ֥י הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠פָּנֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “all the dwellers of the land are so afraid of us that they will not be able to resist us”
109	3:intro	qs85				0	# Joshua 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins to describe how the Israelites crossed the Jordan River, even though it was at flood stage and overflowing its banks, because Yahweh stopped its waters from flowing.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### God dried up the Jordan River\nJoshua told the people in 3:5, “Consecrate yourselves, for tomorrow Yahweh will do wonders in your midst.” He meant that Yahweh would stop the Jordan River from flowing so that they could cross it. The people needed to be in a state of special dedication to Yahweh in order to appreciate what he was doing and take part in it. The conquest of the Promised Land was to be accomplished through the supernatural power of God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n\n
110	3:2	pddt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠קְצֵ֖ה שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days later” or “after they had spent another full day in camp”
111	3:3	whh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [3:3](../03/03.md) and [3:4](../03/04.md) into a verse bridge so that the reason why Joshua wants the Israelites to follow the ark will precede the instructions he gives them to do that. The quotation from Joshua might then read something like this: “Since you have not passed over by the way from yesterday or the third day, so that you will know the way in which you should go, as you see the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh your God and the priests, the Levites, lifting it, then you yourselves shall set out from your place and go after it.”
112	3:4	tn3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance	כְּ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם אַמָּ֖ה	1	The word **cubit** is a measurement equaling the distance from the elbow to the end of the the middle finger tip. If it would help your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about 900 meters” or “about 1,000 yards”
113	3:4	j002		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠תְּמ֥וֹל שִׁלְשֽׁוֹם	1	As in [1:11](../01/11.md) and [3:2](../03/02.md), this expression means “yesterday or the day before.” But in contexts such as this, the expression mean more generally “at any time in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at any time in the past”
114	3:7	q8ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Yahweh is using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents judgment and perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of all the Israelites”
115	3:8	pd66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כְּ⁠בֹאֲ⁠כֶ֗ם עַד־ קְצֵה֙ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן בַּ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן תַּעֲמֹֽדוּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that as soon as they come to the edge of the waters of the Jordan, they are to stand still in the Jordan.’”
116	3:9	l0un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־ דִּבְרֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Joshua is using the term **words** to represent what Yahweh is about to say by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Yahweh your God will say to you”
117	3:10	bej3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	וְ⁠הוֹרֵ֣שׁ יוֹרִ֣ישׁ	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **dispossess** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “and he will surely disposesss”
118	3:10	wfhv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	אֶת־ הַ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֨י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠חִתִּ֜י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠חִוִּ֗י וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠פְּרִזִּי֙ וְ⁠אֶת־ הַ⁠גִּרְגָּשִׁ֔י וְ⁠הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific individuals from each of these people groups. He means these people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites and the Hittites and the Hivites and the Perizzites and the Girgashites and the Amorites and the Jebusites”
119	3:12	kdr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	Joshua is using a common expression to indicate individuals representing groups to which they belong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “taking one man from each tribe” or “choosing one representative from each tribe”
120	3:13	fuma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ יִכָּ֣רֵת֔וּ⁠ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will cut off the waters of the Jordan”
121	3:15	s6ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠רַגְלֵ֤י הַ⁠כֹּֽהֲנִים֙ נֹשְׂאֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אָר֔וֹן נִטְבְּל֖וּ בִּ⁠קְצֵ֣ה הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then the priests, the lifters of the Box, dipped their feet into the edge of the water”
122	3:15	mu2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וְ⁠הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן מָלֵא֙ עַל־ כָּל־ גְּדוֹתָ֔י⁠ו כֹּ֖ל יְמֵ֥י קָצִֽיר	1	The author is providing background information to help readers appreciate how great a miracle Yahweh did on this occasion. The implication is that the Israelites crossed the Jordan River during **the days of the harvest**, so Yahweh stopped its waters even when they were overflowing its banks. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
123	3:15	mx3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כֹּ֖ל יְמֵ֥י קָצִֽיר	1	The author is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during harvest time”
124	3:16	bbru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ב⁠אדם & צָֽרְתָ֔ן	1	The words **Adam** and **Zarethan** are the names of cities in the Jordan Valley.
125	3:16	smkr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠יֹּרְדִ֗ים עַ֣ל יָ֧ם הָ⁠עֲרָבָ֛ה יָם־ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לַח תַּ֣מּוּ נִכְרָ֑תוּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh completely cut off those going down to the sea of Arabah, the Sea of Salt”
126	3:16	odow		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יָ֧ם הָ⁠עֲרָבָ֛ה יָם־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לַח	1	The words **Sea of the Arabah** and **Sea of Salt** are both names for what is now known as “the Dead Sea.”
127	4:intro	eh7p				0	# Joshua 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter finishes the story of how the Israelites crossed the Jordan River, even though it was at flood stage and overflowing its banks, because Yahweh stopped its waters from flowing.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Victory through the power of Yahweh\nThe conquest of the land of Canaan was accomplished by Yahweh’s power, which he would show to be greater than that of all the kings in the land of Canaan. Joshua recognized that the Israelites would only be victorious through Yahweh’s power. This is why his first act after crossing the Jordan River was to have them build a monument of stones from the river as a witness to Yahweh’s power. \n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Chiasm\nHebrew poetry sometimes uses a literary device called a “chiasm.” A chiasm is when words or phrases are ordered in a AB-BA sequence. This helped make a saying more memorable. Joshua uses a chiasm in 4:7 when he tells the Israelites what to say to their children when the ask about the monument of stones:\n\nA Because the waters of the Jordan were cut off \nB from the face of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh.\nB In its crossing over in the Jordan, \nA the waters of the Jordan were cut off.\n\nYou may be able to present this in your translation in a way that shows this literary device.\n
128	4:2	j003		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־ אֶחָ֖ד מִ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:12](../03/12.md).
129	4:3	g6yc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠צַוּ֣וּ אוֹתָ⁠ם֮ לֵ⁠אמֹר֒ שְׂאֽוּ־לָ⁠כֶ֨ם מִ⁠זֶּ֜ה מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֗ן מִ⁠מַּצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים הָכִ֖ין שְׁתֵּים־עֶשְׂרֵ֣ה אֲבָנִ֑ים וְ⁠הַעֲבַרְתֶּ֤ם אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הִנַּחְתֶּ֣ם אוֹתָ֔⁠ם בַּ⁠מָּל֕וֹן אֲשֶׁר־תָּלִ֥ינוּ ב֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠לָּֽיְלָה	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And command them to lift up for themselves 12 stones from the midst of the Jordan, from the firm standing place of the feet of the priests, and tell them to bring those stones over with them and leave them in the lodging place in which they will lodge tonight”
130	4:3	cs2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠מַּצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים הָכִ֖ין	1	Joshua is using one part of the priests, their **feet**, to mean all of them in the act of standing in the Jordan riverbed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the firm place on which the priests are now standing”
131	4:4	a96j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־אֶחָ֥ד אִישׁ־אֶחָ֖ד מִ⁠שָּֽׁבֶט	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [4:2](../04/02.md).
132	4:5	gldr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠הָרִ֨ימוּ לָ⁠כֶ֜ם אִ֣ישׁ אֶ֤בֶן אַחַת֙ עַל־ שִׁכְמ֔⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [4:2](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “Each one of you should pick up a large stone and carry it on his shoulder”
133	4:6	v6tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
134	4:6	giom		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מָחָר֙	1	Joshua is speaking as if the children of this generation of Israelites would ask about the stones on the day after this event, **tomorrow**. He is using the term to mean “in the future.” Many languages use this word in the same way, but if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the future”
135	4:6	buys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר מָ֛ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “wanting to know what these stones are to you”
136	4:6	tenj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מָ֛ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לָ⁠כֶֽם	1	The children of these Israelites would be using a common expression to ask about the significance of the stones for their parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What connection do you have with these stones” or “Why did you bring these stones out of the Jordan River”
137	4:7	bq5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲשֶׁ֨ר נִכְרְת֜וּ מֵימֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ & נִכְרְת֖וּ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because Yahweh cut off the waters of the Jordan & Yahweh cut off the waters of the Jordan”
138	4:7	r99r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	אֲשֶׁ֨ר	1	The speakers would leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We brought these stones out of the Jordan because we wanted all future generations to remember that”
139	4:7	ku21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	אֲשֶׁ֨ר נִכְרְת֜וּ מֵימֵ֤י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּן֙ מִ⁠פְּנֵי֙ אֲר֣וֹן בְּרִית־יְהוָ֔ה בְּ⁠עָבְר⁠וֹ֙ בַּ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן נִכְרְת֖וּ מֵ֣י הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֑ן	1	See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter.
140	4:7	ww74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עָבְר⁠וֹ֙	1	Joshua means implicitly that the priests carried **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh** over **the Jordan** River. He is not saying that it crossed over on its own. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the priests carried it over”
141	4:9	fumr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	תַּ֗חַת מַצַּב֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “under the place where the priests had been standing”
142	4:9	wgcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the author is using the term **day** by association to refer to a specific time, the time when he was writing this book. He means that the 12 stones were still in the middle of the Jordan at the time he wrote this account of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly, here and for the other occurrences of this phrase in the book. Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
143	4:10	reg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠יְמַהֲר֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֖ם וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹֽרוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the people **crossed over**. Alternate translation: “and the people crossed over hurriedly”
144	4:11	vff8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֧ר אֲרוֹן־ יְהוָ֛ה וְ⁠הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֖ים	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **the priests** indicates how **the Box of Yahweh** crossed the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “that the priests carried the Box of Yahweh across the Jordan”
145	4:12	y1qn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם מֹשֶֽׁה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could put this phrase at the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for what the rest of the verse describes.
146	4:12	gp7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	חֲמֻשִׁ֔ים	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “carrying weapons”
147	4:13	igh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	חֲלוּצֵ֣י הַ⁠צָּבָ֑א	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “soldiers who had equipped themselves to be part of the army”
148	4:14	b6u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “in the perspective of all the Israelites”
149	4:14	gx13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כָּל־ יְמֵ֥י חַיָּֽי⁠ו	1	The author is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time, the lifetime of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout his lifetime”
150	4:18	ba2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נִתְּק֗וּ כַּפּוֹת֙ רַגְלֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים אֶ֖ל הֶ⁠חָרָבָ֑ה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the priests lifted the soles of their feet up to dry ground”
151	4:18	m5z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כִ⁠תְמוֹל־שִׁלְשׁ֖וֹם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “as they had done previously”
152	4:19	bf72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	עָלוּ֙	1	Your language may say “went up” rather than **came up** in a context such as this. Alternate translation: “went up”
153	4:19	zy5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֖וֹר לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן	1	The **first month** of the Hebrew calendar is named Aviv. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar. You say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote, for example, “The ‘first month’ was the month of Aviv, which is in the spring of the year, in March and April on Western calendars.” Alternate translation: “on the tenth day of the month of Aviv”
154	4:21	flgy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	אֲשֶׁר֩ יִשְׁאָל֨וּ⁠ן בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם מָחָר֙ אֶת־אֲבוֹתָ֣⁠ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר מָ֖ה הָ⁠אֲבָנִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “When your sons ask their fathers tomorrow what these stones are”
155	4:21	m1tm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֤ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
156	4:21	k8ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מָחָר֙	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “in the future”
157	4:22	p6nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Although the term **sons** is masculine, Joshua is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both male and female descendants. Alternate translation: “your children”
158	4:22	gt6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם	1	Joshua is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “then you shall cause your sons to know the meaning of these stones” or “then you shall cause your sons to know why these stones are here”
159	4:22	bwj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֣ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר בַּ⁠יַּבָּשָׁה֙ עָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֶת־הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that Israel crossed over this Jordan on dry ground”
160	4:22	yem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	בַּ⁠יַּבָּשָׁה֙ עָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֖ן הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	The parents would be leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These stones are here so that all future generations will remember that Israel crossed over this Jordan on dry ground”
161	4:24	qe29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֶת־ יַ֣ד יְהוָ֔ה כִּ֥י חֲזָקָ֖ה	1	Here, **hand** represents the capability and power of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has mighty power”
162	4:24	s9y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כָּל־הַ⁠יָּמִֽים	1	Joshua is using the term **days** by association to mean “time,” since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the time” or “always”
163	5:intro	dv8f				0	# Joshua 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter begins with a notice of how the kings in the land of Canaan feared Yahweh when they heard how he had dried up the Jordan River so the Israelites could cross (5:1).\n\nThe chapter then describes how the Israelites were careful to observe the law of Moses as soon as they entered the land of Canaan.\n* The Israelite men were circumcised (5:2–9\n* All the Israelites celebrated Passover (5:10–12)\n\nThe chapter then describes how the commander of Yahweh’s army came to help Joshua defeat his enemies (5:13–15)\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Circumcision\nThis was a sign of the covenant that Yahweh had given to the Israelites through Moses. The book of Joshua explains why the Israelite men who crossed the Jordan River had not yet been circumcised. Fulfilling this sign of the covenant was an important expression of how the Israelites would obey the whole law of Moses when they settled in the land of Canaan. It also affirmed the identity of Israel as a nation. Yahweh said that by having the Israelite men circumcised, he had removed “the disgrace of Egypt.” In Numbers 22:5, King Balak referred to the Israelites simply as “a nation has come out of Egypt,” in other words, a horde of runaway Egyptian slaves. Now the Israelites were being clearly constituted as a distinct people group with their own laws and customs as commanded by Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “a man … standing in front of him”\nThe author uses the expression “a man” to describe the figure who appears to Joshua in in 5:13, but in the next verse this figure explains that he is “the prince of the army of Yahweh.” So this is actually not a human being but more likely an angel. The author uses the phrase “a man” because that what Joshua thought he was at first. Since this figure identifies himself in the next verse, you do not need to say anything such as “an angel who looked like a man” in 5:13 in your translation.\n
164	5:1	wpev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce what happened at the end of the story of the Israelites crossing the Jordan River. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information.
165	5:1	el1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֡י & הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite** or **Canaanite**. He means those people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites … the Canaanites”
166	5:1	iokv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֣ס לְבָבָ֗⁠ם וְ⁠לֹא־הָ֨יָה בָ֥⁠ם עוֹד֙ ר֔וּחַ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “then they became very afraid in their hearts and they were not able to resist”
167	5:2	uwpn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	בָּ⁠עֵ֣ת הַ⁠הִ֗יא	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event.
168	5:2	nc87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	חַֽרְב֣וֹת צֻרִ֑ים	1	The word **flint** describes a type of hard stone. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of stone, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “knives of sharpened stone” or “knives with blades made of stone”
169	5:2	j017		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וְ⁠שׁ֛וּב מֹ֥ל	1	Yahweh is expressing a single idea by using two verbs together. The verb **return** tells in what way he wants Joshua to **circumcise** the Israelite men. Alternate translation: “again circumcise”
170	5:2	glk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠שׁ֛וּב מֹ֥ל אֶת־ בְּנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל שֵׁנִֽית	1	This does not mean that these men had already been circumcised once and that Yahweh wanted Joshua to circumcise each of them for a **second time**. Rather, as [5:4](../05/04.md) explains, the previous generation of male Israelites had been circumcised, but they had died in the wilderness; the current generation of Israelite males had not yet been circumcised. Alternate translation: “and do a second general circumcision of all Israelite males, for this generation”
171	5:2	d7tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	שֵׁנִֽית	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for time number two”
172	5:3	m1u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֨מָל֙	1	There were over 600,000 males, so the author is using **Joshua**, who was in charge of this task, to represent the many people who were necessarily involved. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And he and other Israelite leaders circumcised”
173	5:3	jin6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	גִּבְעַ֖ת הָ⁠עֲרָלֽוֹת	1	**Gibeath Haaraloth** is the name that the Israelites gave to the place where they held this second general circumcision ceremony. The name commemorates the Israelites rededicating themselves to Yahweh. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. Alternate translation: “the Hill of the Foreskins”
174	5:4	i17c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	הַ⁠יֹּצֵא֩ & בְּ⁠צֵאתָ֖⁠ם	1	In a context such as this, your language may say “having gone” and “in their going out” rather than **having come** and **in their coming out**. Use whichever is more natural, here and in the next two verses.
175	5:5	u9fk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	כִּֽי־ מֻלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם הַ⁠יֹּֽצְאִ֑ים וְ⁠כָל־ הָ֠⁠עָם הַ⁠יִּלֹּדִ֨ים	1	There is a contrasting relationship between these two clauses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a connecting word or phrase on the first clause rather than on the second one. Alternate translation: “while all of the people having come out were circumcised, all the people born”
176	5:5	b06g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	מֻלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם הַ⁠יֹּֽצְאִ֑ים	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had circumcised all the people who came out”
177	5:5	mqv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָ֖ם & הָ֠⁠עָם	1	In this verse, the expression **the people** means “the males.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the males … the males”
178	5:5	mhgs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/ writing-pronouns	לֹא־ מָֽלוּ	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “had not been circumcised” or “no one had circumcised”
179	5:6	jre1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַרְבָּעִ֣ים שָׁנָ֗ה הָלְכ֣וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֮ בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּר֒ עַד־ תֹּ֨ם כָּל־ הַ⁠גּ֜וֹי אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּלְחָמָה֙ הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֣ים מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹֽא־ שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because they had not listened to the voice of Yahweh, the sons of Israel had walked in the wilderness 40 years, until the finishing of all of the nation of the men of war having come out from Egypt”
180	5:6	qbbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠גּ֜וֹי אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּלְחָמָה֙	1	The author seems to be speaking as if these **men of war** were a **nation** of their own. In this language and culture, people sometimes used the term “nation” to mean “army,” as in [Joel 1:6](../jol/01/06.md), for example. Alternate translation: “the men of war in the army”
181	5:6	u9iz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	Here, the word **listened** means “obeyed.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they had not obeyed the voice of Yahweh”
182	5:6	k8wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠ק֣וֹל יְהוָ֑ה	1	The author is using the **voice** of Yahweh by association to mean the things that Yahweh commanded by using his voice. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “had not obeyed what Yahweh commanded them” or “had not done what Yahweh told them to do”
183	5:6	mu8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לַֽ⁠אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1	The author is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their ancestors”
184	5:6	o55f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	לָ֔⁠נוּ	1	The author is addressing his listeners directly by saying **us**. Since the original listeners were Israelites, **us** would have been inclusive if he had marked that form. However, unless your readers are Israelites, they would not be included in the promises described here, which Yahweh made to Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, and their descendants. So it might be more natural in your language to use the exclusive form if your language marks that distinction. Decide as a team how to translate this.
185	5:6	jrp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ	1	Yahweh spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the **milk** and **honey** from those animals and plants were actually **flowing** through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a fertile land that produces many good things”
186	5:7	p9pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אֹתָ֖⁠ם מָ֣ל יְהוֹשֻׁ֑עַ כִּי־ עֲרֵלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כִּ֛י לֹא־ מָ֥לוּ אוֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠דָּֽרֶךְ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange these three phrases so that each phrase gives the reason for the result that the next phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because they had not circumcised them on the way, they were uncircumcised. So Joshua circumcised them.”
187	5:7	j004		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	עֲרֵלִ֣ים הָי֔וּ כִּ֛י לֹא־ מָ֥לוּ אוֹתָ֖⁠ם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “no one had circumcised them yet; no one had done this` on the way”
188	5:8	gl0s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	תַּ֥מּוּ כָל־ הַ⁠גּ֖וֹי לְ⁠הִמּ֑וֹל	1	The author is using the term * nation** as in [5:6](../05/06.md), to refer specifically to the Israelite males. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of the Israelite males had finished being circumcised”
189	5:8	j005		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	תַּ֥מּוּ כָל־ הַ⁠גּ֖וֹי לְ⁠הִמּ֑וֹל	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the leaders had finished circumcising all of the Israelite males”
190	5:9	x1q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	גַּלּ֛וֹתִי אֶת־ חֶרְפַּ֥ת מִצְרַ֖יִם מֵ⁠עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	Yahweh is speaking as if he had actually **rolled away** the **disgrace of Egypt** from the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have removed the disgrace of Egypt from you”
191	5:9	sgya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גַּלּ֛וֹתִי אֶת־ חֶרְפַּ֥ת מִצְרַ֖יִם מֵ⁠עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **disgrace**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “I have taken you out of the disgraceful situation you were in as former slaves of the Egyptians”
192	5:9	j001		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙ גִּלְגָּ֔ל	1	It might seem that the expression **calls the name** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “people call that place Gilgal” or “the name of that place has been Gilgal”
193	5:10	tdl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֥וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use an ordinal number here. (The expression **the month** refers implicitly to the “first month” or the Hebrew month Aviv, as in [4:19](../04/19.md). Alternate translation: “on the fourteenth day of the month of Aviv”
194	5:11	g1ks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠קָל֑וּי	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and grain that they had roasted”
195	5:13	hegq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּשָּׂ֤א עֵינָי⁠ו֙ וַ⁠יַּ֔רְא	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Joshua looked some distance away, since he **lifted up his eyes** in order to do this and he had to walk over to the man whom he saw. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that he looked off into the distance”
196	5:13	x26s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּה	1	The author is using the term **behold** to focus attention on what happens next in this story. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
197	5:13	ds5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠חַרְבּ֥⁠וֹ שְׁלוּפָ֖ה בְּ⁠יָד֑⁠וֹ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he had drawn his sword and was holding it in his hand”
198	5:14	r42a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּפֹּל֩ יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ אֶל־פָּנָ֥י⁠ו אַ֨רְצָ⁠ה֙ וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּ֔חוּ	1	The phrase **fell on his face to the earth** means that Joshua intentionally got down on his knees and touched the ground with his face. In that culture, this action was a way that a person showed great respect and reverence for someone else. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. You could also explain the significance of the gesture; the UST models one way to do that.
199	5:14	j018		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מָ֥ה אֲדֹנִ֖⁠י מְדַבֵּ֥ר אֶל־ עַבְדּֽ⁠וֹ	1	As a way of showing respect, Joshua is speaking to the prince of Yahweh’s army and about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second and first persons. Alternate translation: “What are you, my lord, speaking to me, your servant”
200	5:15	qu3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	שַׁל־נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔⁠ךָ כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֛ה עֹמֵ֥ד עָלָ֖י⁠ו קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֑וּא	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the place that you are standing on is holy, slip off your sandal from upon your foot”
201	5:15	ge5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	שַׁל־נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	Joshua removing his **sandal** was a symbolic action by which he showed great respect and reverence towards someone superior and acknowledged his willingness to obey him. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. You could also explain the significance of the gesture; the UST models one way to do that.
202	5:15	j006		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	נַֽעַלְ⁠ךָ֙	1	The prince of Yahweh’s army is not referring to one particular **sandal** that Joshua was wearing. He means both of Joshua’s sandals. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “your sandals”
203	6:intro	uie9				0	# Joshua 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes the supernatural way in which Yahweh enabled the Israelites to defeat the people of Jericho and destroy that city.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Yahweh conquers\nThe circumstances of Israel’s victory in the battle for Jericho were very unusual. An army would not march around a city or shout in order to win a military battle. It was Yahweh who gave the Israelites the victory, as Joshua made clear in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “devoted”\nThe specialized term that the ULT translates as “devoted” occurs several times in this chapter. See the discussion of that term in the General Introduction to Joshua, and see the UST for an expression of its meaning in the specific contexts where it is used in this chapter.\n
204	6:1	gbz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ סֹגֶ֣רֶת וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל אֵ֥ין יוֹצֵ֖א וְ⁠אֵ֥ין בָּֽא	1	The author is providing background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
205	6:1	aozr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ סֹגֶ֣רֶת וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל אֵ֥ין יוֹצֵ֖א וְ⁠אֵ֥ין בָּֽא	1	The phrases **Now Jericho {was} shutting and {was} being shut up** and ** There was no going out and there was no coming in** mean basically the same thing. The author is using them together for emphasis. See the further discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “The rulers of Jericho were so afraid of the Israelites that they had shut the city gates so that no one could enter, and they had shut up the people inside so that no one could leave”
206	6:1	jq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מְסֻגֶּ֔רֶת	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the rulers had also shut up the people inside”
207	6:2	qfoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רְאֵה֙	1	Yahweh is speaking as if he wants Joshua to **See** or look at something. He is actually using the term to focus Joshua’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
208	6:2	j65i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֣תִּי	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I am about to give” or “I will certainly give”
209	6:2	v4hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ אֶת־יְרִיח֖וֹ	1	Here, **hand** represents by association the control or power that a person would have over something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have delivered Jericho to your control” or “I have allowed you to conquer Jericho”
210	6:2	djup		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	גִּבּוֹרֵ֖י הֶ⁠חָֽיִל	1	Yahweh is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “and the mighty men of valor” or “along with the mighty men of valor”
211	6:2	km13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֖י הֶ⁠חָֽיִל	1	See how you translated the phrase **mighty men of valor** in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “the valiant warriors”
212	6:3	fu9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	פַּ֣עַם אֶחָ֑ת	1	The context implies that they were to walk around the city **one time** each day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “one time each day”
213	6:5	j007		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	בִּ⁠מְשֹׁ֣ךְ ׀ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶן הַ⁠יּוֹבֵ֗ל	1	Yahweh is using this possessive form to mean the **horn** that makes a **blast**. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning with a different form. Alternate translation: “when the priests sound a blast on the horn”
214	6:5	oe7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָ֖ם & הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	In this context, the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers … the soldiers”
215	6:5	zdc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠עָל֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	Here, the phrase **go up** refers to climbing up over the collapsed pieces of the walls to get into the city. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the soldiers will climb up over the collapsed city walls”
216	6:5	ukux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֥ישׁ נֶגְדּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh is using a common expression to mean that each of the soldiers in the army that is encircling the city should rush into the part of it that is directly in front of him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each soldier going into the part of the city that is in front of him”
217	6:7	jf9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עִבְר֖וּ & יַעֲבֹ֕ר	1	The phrase **pass over** is a common expression that indicates walking or moving forward. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Start walking & will walk”
218	6:7	g18m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הֶ֣⁠חָל֔וּץ	1	To translate this term here and in verse 9, see how you translated the similar expression in [4:12](../04/12.md). Alternate translation: “and the soldiers with their weapons”
219	6:8	y78m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עָבְר֕וּ	1	See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “went forward” or “advanced”
220	6:8	l35d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה	1	As the last sentence in this verse makes clear, the author is using the name **Yahweh** by association to mean **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh**, since it represents Yahweh’s presence with the people of Israel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh”
221	6:8	ayf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠אֲרוֹן֙ בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה הֹלֵ֖ךְ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	The author does not mean that **the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh** was **going** by itself. Priests were carrying it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priests carrying the Box of the Covenant of Yahweh went behind them”
222	6:9	gch6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אַחֲרֵ֣י הָ⁠אָר֔וֹן	1	Here again, it is implied that priests were carrying **the Box**. Alternate translation: “behind the Box, which priests were carrying”
223	6:9	i5vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and behind the priests who were walking and blowing on the shofars”
224	6:10	v7ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֩	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md), the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
225	6:10	ar1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	לֹ֤א תָרִ֨יעוּ֙ וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַשְׁמִ֣יעוּ אֶת־קוֹלְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠לֹא־יֵצֵ֥א מִ⁠פִּי⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָ֑ר עַ֠ד י֣וֹם אָמְרִ֧⁠י אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם	1	The phrases **You shall not shout**, **you shall not make your voice heard**, and **a word shall not go out from your mouth** mean very similar things. Joshua says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to emphasize to the Israelite soldiers and priests that they must remain completely silent until he gives them the command, **Shout!** If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “ “You must remain completely silent” or “You must remain absolutely quiet”
226	6:10	tc4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	י֣וֹם	1	Joshua is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time when”
227	6:11	hf4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּסֵּ֤ב אֲרוֹן־יְהוָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עִ֔יר	1	Here, the word **he** refers to Joshua. It is implied that Joshua did not carry the **Box of Yahweh** around Jericho himself but rather instructed the priests do it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priests brought the box of Yahweh around the city”
228	6:13	lxf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֹלְכִ֣ים הָל֔וֹךְ	1	The author is repeating the verb **walking** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were walking continually”
229	6:13	wjy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while the priests were walking and blowing on the shofars”
230	6:13	qp0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	הָל֖וֹךְ וְ⁠תָק֥וֹעַ בַּ⁠שּׁוֹפָרֽוֹת	1	The author may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. While the priests actually were **walking** and **blowing on the shofars** at the same time, the word **walking** might be describing in what way the priests were **blowing**, that is, continually. Alternate translation: “blowing continually on the shofars”
231	6:14	j232		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day two”
232	6:15	cc1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven”
233	6:15	bgwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כַּ⁠עֲל֣וֹת הַ⁠שַּׁ֔חַר	1	The author is using the word **dawn** by association to mean the sun. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as the sun had risen” or “right at dawn”
234	6:16	sc3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֙	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md) and [6:10](../06/10.md), the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
235	6:16	fj73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם אֶת־הָ⁠עִֽיר	1	Joshua is using the past tense in order to refer to something that Yahweh will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. See how you translated the similar expression in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “Yahweh is about to give the city to you” or “Yahweh will certainly give the city to you”
236	6:17	a98e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1	To decide how to translate the term **devoted** here, in the next verse, and in verse 21, see the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua. Also see how you translated the term in [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “something that we must destroy completely”
237	6:17	qcml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	רַק֩ רָחָ֨ב הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֜ה תִּֽחְיֶ֗ה הִ֚יא וְ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אִתָּ֣⁠הּ בַּ⁠בַּ֔יִת כִּ֣י הֶחְבְּאַ֔תָה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְאָכִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר שָׁלָֽחְנוּ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because she hid the messengers whom we sent, only Rahab the prostitute will live, she and all who are with her in the house”
238	6:18	ntwr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	אַתֶּם֙ שִׁמְר֣וּ & תַּחֲרִ֖ימוּ וּ⁠לְקַחְתֶּ֣ם & וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֞ם	1	In this verse, every occurrence of the word **you** refers to the Israelite soldiers, and so each is plural. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
239	6:19	j019		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	קֹ֥דֶשׁ ה֖וּא	1	Since Joshua has just described a list of things, it may be more natural in your language to use the pronoun “they” rather than **it**. Alternate translation: “they are holy things”
240	6:20	fm69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וַֽ⁠יִּתְקְע֖וּ & וַֽ⁠יִּלְכְּד֖וּ	1	In its first instance, the pronoun **they** refers to the priests. In its second instance, it refers to **the people**, that is, the soldiers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “and the priests blew … and the soldiers captured”
241	6:20	p5kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יַּ֨עַל הָ⁠עָ֤ם הָ⁠עִ֨ירָ⁠ה֙ אִ֣ישׁ נֶגְדּ֔⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [6:5](../06/05.md). Alternate translation: “and the soldiers climbed up over the collapsed city walls, each soldier going into the part of the city that was in front of him”
242	6:21	b19h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	מֵ⁠אִישׁ֙ וְ⁠עַד־ אִשָּׁ֔ה מִ⁠נַּ֖עַר וְ⁠עַד־ זָקֵ֑ן	1	When he speaks of **man** and **woman**, and also when he speaks of **young** and **old**, the author is using two things to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “including all the people who lived there, regardless of their age or sex”
243	6:21	hmkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	מִ⁠נַּ֖עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֑ן	1	The author is using the adjectives **young** and **old** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “from young people to old people”
244	6:21	cf5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב	1	To decide how to translate this expression here and in its other occurrences, see the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua. Alternate translation: “destroying it completely”
245	6:22	vluk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	בֹּ֖אוּ בֵּית־הָ⁠אִשָּׁ֣ה הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֑ה וְ⁠הוֹצִ֨יאוּ מִ⁠שָּׁ֤ם אֶת־הָֽ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ וְ⁠אֶת־כָּל־אֲשֶׁר־לָ֔⁠הּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִשְׁבַּעְתֶּ֖ם לָֽ⁠הּ	1	Joshua is describing one event before describing another event that preceded it. In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they happened. Alternate translation: “Since you swore to the woman, the prostitute, that you would do this, enter her house and bring out from there the woman and all who are to her”
246	6:22	d0fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	הָ⁠אִשָּׁ֣ה הַ⁠זּוֹנָ֑ה	1	Joshua is using the phrase **the woman, the prostitute** to reintroduce Rahab as a participant in the story. If your language has its own way of reintroducing participants, you can use it here in your translation.
247	6:22	krqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	נִשְׁבַּעְתֶּ֖ם	1	Since Joshua is speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
248	6:24	xrii		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֛יר שָׂרְפ֥וּ בָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ	1	It might seem that the expression **burned with fire** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “And they burned down the city” or “And they set fire to the city”
249	6:24	ny39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בֵּית־יְהוָֽה	1	The phrase **the house of Yahweh** is another name for the tent of meeting. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as the UST does.
250	6:25	yhp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְֽ⁠אֶת־רָחָ֣ב הַ֠⁠זּוֹנָה וְ⁠אֶת־בֵּ֨ית אָבִ֤י⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־כָּל־אֲשֶׁר־לָ⁠הּ֙ הֶחֱיָ֣ה יְהוֹשֻׁ֔עַ וַ⁠תֵּ֨שֶׁב֙ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶב יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּ֤י הֶחְבִּ֨יאָה֙ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְאָכִ֔ים אֲשֶׁר־שָׁלַ֥ח יְהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ לְ⁠רַגֵּ֥ל אֶת־יְרִיחֽוֹ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because Rahab hid the messengers whom Joshua had sent to spy on Jericho, Joshua kept her and the house of her father and all who belonged to her alive. And she has dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day”
251	6:25	l990		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠תֵּ֨שֶׁב֙ בְּ⁠קֶ֣רֶב יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	Depending on when this account was written, the word **she** could refer to: (1) Rahab herself. Alternate translation: “And Rahab has dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day” (2) Rahab’s descendants. Alternate translation: “And Rahab’s descendants have dwelt in the midst of Israel to this day”
252	6:25	d0je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	The author is speaking of the Israelite people by association with the man **Israel** from whom they descended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel”
253	6:25	czcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [4:9](../04/09.md) and [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
254	6:26	rmeu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	אָר֨וּר הָ⁠אִ֜ישׁ	1	Joshua is not speaking of one particular **man** but of any man who might possibly rebuild Jericho in the future, If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Cursed is any man”
255	6:26	gx0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֤ר יָקוּם֙ וּ⁠בָנָ֞ה	1	As in the similar expression in [1:2](../01/02.md), here Joshua is using the word **arises** to mean “takes action.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who undertakes to rebuild”
256	6:26	gv1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠בְכֹר֣⁠וֹ יְיַסְּדֶ֔⁠נָּה וּ⁠בִ⁠צְעִיר֖⁠וֹ יַצִּ֥יב דְּלָתֶֽי⁠הָ	1	By **With** and **with**, Joshua does not mean that the man he is describing will work together with **his oldest son** to lay the foundations of Jericho and work together with **his youngest son** to set up its gates. He means that these sons will die at the beginning and ending of the rebuilding. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “At the cost of his firstborn he will found it, and at the cost of his youngest he will set up its gates”
257	6:26	tg4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בִּ⁠בְכֹר֣⁠וֹ & וּ⁠בִ⁠צְעִיר֖⁠וֹ	1	Joshua is using the adjectives **oldest** and **youngest** as nouns to refer to certain kinds of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with his oldest son … with his youngest son”
258	7:intro	uv41				0	# Joshua 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how the army of the city of Ai, which was much smaller than Jericho, was able to defeat the Israelites because one of them disobeyed Yahweh’s command not to take any plunder from Jericho. The chapter describes how Yahweh identified that person, a man named Achan, and how the Israelites punished him by execution for what he did.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Sin brought defeat\n\nIt was great sin for Achan to take what Yahweh had said was to be destroyed. Because of his sin, Yahweh withheld victory from the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “devoted”\nThe specialized term that the ULT translates as “devoted” occurs several times in this chapter. See the discussion of that term in the General Introduction to Joshua, and see the UST for an expression of its meaning in the specific contexts where it is used in this chapter.\n\n### “went up”\nAs the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, Hebrew writers marked travel descriptions for change in elevation. So the author typically says “went up” when he describes how the Israelite soldiers went from Gilgal in the Jordan River valley to the city of Ai in a hilly area. If your language does not mark travel notices for change in elevation, you can translate these expressions more simply and say “went.”\n
259	7:1	e12p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וַ⁠יִּמְעֲל֧וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מַ֖עַל בַּ⁠חֵ֑רֶם	1	In this verse, the author is providing background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
260	7:1	v6rb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	וַ⁠יִּמְעֲל֧וּ בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מַ֖עַל	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. The idea is that one Israelite did something secret and deceptive that was a betrayal of the trust that Yahweh had placed in all of the Israelites. Alternate translation: “But the sons of Israel deceptively betrayed Yahweh”
261	7:1	mtm4			בַּ⁠חֵ֑רֶם & הַ⁠חֵ֔רֶם	1	To decide how to translate the term **devoted** in its two instances here and throughout this chapter, see the discussion in the General Introduction to Joshua. Also see how you translated the term in [2:10](../02/10.md) and in [6:17–21](../06/17.md). Alternate translation: “regarding something they were supposed to destroy completely … the things they were supposed to destroy completely”
262	7:1	z3zl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עָכָ֣ן & כַּרְמִי֩ & זַבְדִּ֨י & זֶ֜רַח	1	**Achan**, **Karmi**, **Zabdi**, and **Zerah** are the names of men.
263	7:1	li2v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אַ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה	1	The author is using the **nose** of Yahweh to mean his anger, by association with the way that a person who is angry breathes heavily through his nose. Your language and culture may also associate anger with a particular part of the body. If so, you could use an expression involving that part of the body in your translation. You could also use plain language. Alternate translation: “the anger of Yahweh”
264	7:1	j020		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּֽחַר	1	The author is speaking as if the **nose** of Yahweh, representing his anger, had actually **burned**. He mans that it became very intense. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And … became very intense”
265	7:2	uwga		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בֵּ֥ית אָ֨וֶן֙	1	**Beth Aven** is the name of a town.
266	7:2	h9cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠קֶּ֣דֶם לְ⁠בֵֽית־ אֵ֔ל	1	The author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. He means that if someone were traveling from **Bethel** to **Beth Aven**, he would be coming **from the east**. In your translation express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “to the east of Bethel”
267	7:2	si6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	עֲל֖וּ & וַֽ⁠יַּעֲלוּ֙ הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expressions **Go up** and **went up** indicate that the Israelite spies had to move upward in elevation in order to spy out Ai. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten these expressions here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “‘Go …’ And the men went”
268	7:3	dx9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	אַל־ תְּיַגַּע־ שָׁ֨מָּ⁠ה֙ אֶת־ כָּל־ הָ⁠עָ֔ם כִּ֥י מְעַ֖ט הֵֽמָּה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they are few, do not make all the people weary there”
269	7:3	in9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠עָם֙	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md) and several other places in Chapter 6, the phrase **the people** refers to the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers”
270	7:3	xxfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	כִּ֥י מְעַ֖ט הֵֽמָּה	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the inhabitants of the city of Ai, not to the soldiers in the Israelite army. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “because the people who live in that city are few”
271	7:5	nyw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	הַ⁠שְּׁבָרִ֔ים	1	The word translated as **the stone quarries** could be: (1) a description of a geographic feature near the city of Ai. Alternate translation: “the nearby rock quarries” (2) the name of a place. If you decide that this is the name of a place, you can spell the Hebrew word the way it sounds in your language. Alternate translation: “Shebarim”
272	7:5	vluc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠שְּׁבָרִ֔ים	1	A quarry is a place from which people take stones to use for building things. Normally, **quarries** are large pits that are deep. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of place, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the pits where people had dug stones out of the ground” or “a place where people had dug stones out of the ground”
273	7:5	k7b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֥ס לְבַב־הָ⁠עָ֖ם וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מָֽיִם	1	The expressions **melted** and **became water** mean similar things. The author is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “and in their hearts, the people became very afraid”
274	7:5	j2v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּמַּ֥ס לְבַב־הָ⁠עָ֖ם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [2:11](../02/11.md) and [5:1](../05/01.md).
275	7:5	yl48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מָֽיִם	1	The author is speaking as if the hearts of the Israelite soldiers actually **became water**. This is another way of saying that the soldiers became afraid. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “and they no longer had any solid courage”
276	7:6	ty1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֨ע יְהוֹשֻׁ֜עַ שִׂמְלֹתָ֗י⁠ו	1	Joshua **tore his garments** as a symbolic act to show his grief and distress. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “And Joshua tore his garments to express his grief and distress”
277	7:6	yewb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּפֹּל֩ עַל־פָּנָ֨י⁠ו אַ֜רְצָ⁠ה	1	See how you translated the phrase **fell on his face to the earth** in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “and knelt down and touched his face to the ground”
278	7:6	xhvl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יַּעֲל֥וּ עָפָ֖ר עַל־רֹאשָֽׁ⁠ם	1	Joshua put dust on his head as a further symbolic act done to show grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “And they made dust go up on their heads to show their grief”
279	7:7	tw2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אֲהָ֣הּ ׀ אֲדֹנָ֣⁠י יְהוִ֗ה	1	Joshua is using the word translated as **Alas** to express a strong feeling of fear and distress. There may be an equivalent word or expression in your language that you can use in your translation to convey this strong feeling. If not, you could specify that Gideon said this because he was feeling fear. Alternate translation: “Oh, no! My Lord Yahweh!” or “I am afraid, my Lord Yahweh!”
280	7:7	j008		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֵעֲבַ֨רְתָּ הַעֲבִ֜יר אֶת־ הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֶת־ הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֔ן	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **bring across** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “did you bring this people across the Jordan at all”
281	7:7	run5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לָ⁠תֵ֥ת אֹתָ֛⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֥ד הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י	1	See how you translated this idiom in [2:24](../02/24.md). Alternate translation: “to enable the Amorite to conquer us”
282	7:7	lt6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הָ⁠אֱמֹרִ֖י	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means the Amorite people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
283	7:7	aq5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	הוֹאַ֣לְנוּ וַ⁠נֵּ֔שֶׁבן	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and**. The verb **had been content** tells in what way Joshua wishes the Israelites **had stayed** on the other side of the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “we had stayed contentedly”
284	7:8	djz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מָ֣ה אֹמַ֔ר	1	Joshua is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing I can say”
285	7:8	s4eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הָפַ֧ךְ יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל עֹ֖רֶף לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י אֹיְבָֽי⁠ו	1	Joshua is using a common expression to mean that the Israelite soldiers stopped fighting and ran away from the battle. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite soldiers have run away from the enemies they were fighting”
286	7:9	b0og		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֗י	1	Joshua is not referring to a specific **Canaanite**. He means the Canaanite people groups in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites”
287	7:9	n2kp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הִכְרִ֥יתוּ אֶת־ שְׁמֵ֖⁠נוּ מִן־ הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ	1	Joshua is speaking as if the Canaanite people groups would actually **cut off** the **name** of the Israelites **from the earth**, as if their name were a physical part of the earth. He is using their **name** to represent their reputation and the memory of them, he is using the phrase **cut off** to mean “bring to an end” or “cause to cease,” and he is using the **earth** to mean the people who live on the earth. Alternate translation: “and they will make the people of the earth forget that we ever existed”
288	7:9	afxk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וּ⁠מַֽה־תַּעֲשֵׂ֖ה לְ⁠שִׁמְ⁠ךָ֥ הַ⁠גָּדֽוֹל	1	Joshua is using the question form for emphasis. He is using Yahweh’s **name** to represent his reputation. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “And then it would be difficult for you to do something about your name!”
289	7:9	r713		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠מַֽה־תַּעֲשֵׂ֖ה לְ⁠שִׁמְ⁠ךָ֥ הַ⁠גָּדֽוֹל	1	Yahweh’s **name** represents his reputation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And what will you do to preserve your great reputation?” or “And then your great reputation will suffer!”
290	7:10	hqu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	לָ֣⁠מָּה זֶּ֔ה אַתָּ֖ה נֹפֵ֥ל עַל־פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is not asking for information. He is using the question form to rebuke Joshua. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be falling on your face!”
291	7:10	bfax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	נֹפֵ֥ל עַל־פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [7:06](../07/06.md).
292	7:11	z8cs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	חָטָא֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠גַם֙ עָבְר֣וּ אֶת־ בְּרִיתִ֔⁠י	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and**. The verb **transgressed** tells in what way Israel has **sinned**. Alternate translation: “Israel has sinned by transgressing my covenant”
293	7:12	yzi5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹ֨א יֻכְל֜וּ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “were not able to resist their enemies”
294	7:12	xix1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עֹ֗רֶף יִפְנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹֽיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	See how you translated this idiom in [7:8](../07/08.md). Alternate translation: “They ran away from the enemies they were fighting”
295	7:13	v2v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	קֻ֚ם	1	While Yahweh does want Joshua to get up from kneeling down with his face on the ground, he is probably using the expression **Arise** to tell him to take action. Alternate translation: “Get going”
296	7:13	nmas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	קַדֵּ֣שׁ אֶת־ הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֖ הִתְקַדְּשׁ֣וּ לְ⁠מָחָ֑ר	1	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that continues through [7:15](../07/15.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate all of it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. The UST models one way to do that. Alternate translation: “Consecrate the people and tell them to consecrate themselves for tomorrow …”
297	7:13	ukcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	הִתְקַדְּשׁ֣וּ לְ⁠מָחָ֑ר	1	This is the beginning of a second-level quotation. If you do not translate it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, you may wish to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation.
298	7:13	wlx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	חֵ֤רֶם בְּ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֣א תוּכַ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ עַד־ הֲסִירְ⁠כֶ֥ם הַ⁠חֵ֖רֶם מִֽ⁠קִּרְבְּ⁠כֶֽם	1	This is a third-level quotation. If you do not translate it so that there is not a quotation within a quotation within a quotation, you may wish to mark it with opening and closing third-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate a third-level quotation.
299	7:13	ysle		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	יְהוָ֜ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is instructing Joshua to refer to the Israelites in the third person, calling them by the name of their ancestor **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second person. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your God”
300	7:13	j4ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לֹ֣א תוּכַ֗ל לָ⁠קוּם֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֹיְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You will not be able to resist your enemies”
301	7:14	hjpk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִקְרַבְתֶּ֥ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Joshua shall bring you near”
302	7:14	gjw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֲשֶׁר־ יִלְכְּדֶ֨⁠נּוּ יְהוָ֜ה & אֲשֶֽׁר־ יִלְכְּדֶ֤⁠נָּה יְהוָה֙ & אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִלְכְּדֶ֣⁠נּוּ יְהוָ֔ה	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “that I take … that I take … that I take”
303	7:15	iufl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	הַ⁠נִּלְכָּ֣ד בַּ⁠חֵ֔רֶם יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ אֹת֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־ כָּל־ אֲשֶׁר־ ל֑⁠וֹ כִּ֤י עָבַר֙ אֶת־ בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠כִֽי־ עָשָׂ֥ה נְבָלָ֖ה בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that the reason for the command is placed before the result. Alternate translation: “because he has transgressed the covenant of Yahweh, and because he has done a disgraceful thing in Israel, the one taken with the devoted thing shall be burned with the fire, he and all that belongs to him”
304	7:15	d5nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠נִּלְכָּ֣ד בַּ⁠חֵ֔רֶם יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the previous verse indicates that Yahweh is the one who will “take” or catch the person who stole the devoted things, and the context implies that the Israelites are the ones who are supposed burn the one who took the banned things. Alternate translation: “you shall burn with fire the one Yahweh catches with the devoted thing”
305	7:15	i5e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	יִשָּׂרֵ֣ף בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “shall be burned to death”
306	7:15	fdmx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֶת־בְּרִ֣ית יְהוָ֔ה	1	For emphasis, Yahweh is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “my covenant” or “the covenant that I, Yahweh, have made with you”
307	7:15	cngm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠כִֽי־ עָשָׂ֥ה נְבָלָ֖ה בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This is the end of the second-level quotation that began in [7:13](../07/13.md). It is also the end of the first-level quotation that began in [7:10](../07/10.md) You may wish to indicate this with closing second-level and first-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the end of quotations.
308	7:16	j000		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד שֵׁ֥בֶט יְהוּדָֽה	1	The cultural context suggests that Joshua may have used lots (small, marked stones) in this process, expecting that Yahweh would control which way they fell and thus guide the identification process. Alternate translation: “And Joshua cast lots, and the tribe of Judah was taken”
309	7:16	g7qp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד שֵׁ֥בֶט יְהוּדָֽה	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh indicated the tribe of Judah” or “And Yahweh guided the lots to identify the tribe of Judah”
310	7:17	z419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠זַּרְחִ֑י & הַ⁠זַּרְחִי֙	1	The word **Zerahite** is the name of a clan made up of the descendants of the man named Zerah who was the great-grandfather of Achan mentioned in [7:1](../07/01.md). Express this relationship by descent in the terms that your culture would use. Alternate translation: “the Zerahites … the Zerahites” or “the descendants of Zerah … the descendants of Zerah”
311	7:17	ha7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/metonymy	זַבְדִּֽי	1	The author is using the name **Zabdi** by association to mean his “house” or extended family, as [7:14](../07/14.md) indicates. **Zabdi** was the grandfather of Achan, and Achan would have been included in his extended family. Alternate translation: “the extended family of Zabdi”
312	7:17	aygr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלְכֹּ֕ד אֵ֖ת מִשְׁפַּ֣חַת הַ⁠זַּרְחִ֑י & וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֖ד זַבְדִּֽי	1	See how you translated the similar passive expression in [7:16](../07/16.md).
313	7:18	q8ct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּלָּכֵ֗ד עָכָ֞ן	1	See how you translated the similar passive expressions in [7:16](../07/16.md) and [7:17](../07/17.md)
314	7:19	sefx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	בְּנִ⁠י֙	1	Achan was not Joshua’s **son**. Joshua is addressing Achan using a polite form of address that someone of a higher status would use when addressing someone of a lower status in that culture. Use a form for addressing someone politely in your language that would be appropriate in this context.
315	7:19	n2jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	שִֽׂים־נָ֣א כָב֗וֹד לַֽ⁠יהוָ֛ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	Joshua is using the expression **give glory to Yahweh the God of Israel** to encourage Achan to tell the truth and admit what he has done wrong. This will **give glory** to Yahweh by vindicating his justice that led him to allow the people of Ai to defeat the Israelites. Alternate translation: “vindicate the justice of Yahweh, the God of Israel, by telling the truth”
316	7:19	k521		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שִֽׂים־ נָ֣א כָב֗וֹד לַֽ⁠יהוָ֛ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל וְ⁠תֶן־ ל֣⁠וֹ תוֹדָ֑ה	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **confession**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “now glorify Yahweh, the God of Israel, and confess to him”
317	7:20	irxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠כָ⁠זֹ֥את וְ⁠כָ⁠זֹ֖את עָשִֽׂיתִי	1	Achan is using a common expression of his culture, **like this and like this**, to mean that he is about to provide exact details. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And this is exactly what I have done”
318	7:21	b9nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	וּ⁠מָאתַ֧יִם שְׁקָלִ֣ים כֶּ֗סֶף וּ⁠לְשׁ֨וֹן זָהָ֤ב אֶחָד֙ חֲמִשִּׁ֤ים שְׁקָלִים֙ מִשְׁקָל֔⁠וֹ	1	At that time, a shekel was a measure of weight. If it would help your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “and about 5 pounds of silver and one wedge of gold whose weight was a little over a pound” or “and 200 pieces of silver weighing over two kilograms and a wedge of gold that weighed about half a kilogram”
319	7:21	jwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנָּ֨⁠ם	1	See how you translated the word **behold** in [2:2](../02/02.md), where it occurs with the same meaning.
320	7:21	xw3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	טְמוּנִ֥ים בָּ⁠אָ֛רֶץ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context indicates that “Achan” did it. Alternate translation: “I hid them in the earth”
321	7:21	u41u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	תַּחְתֶּֽי⁠הָ	1	Since Achan is saying that the **silver** is beneath the **coat** and the **gold**, it may be more natural in your language to use a plural pronoun here. Alternate translation: “under them”
322	7:22	nz5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֧ה טְמוּנָ֛ה בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ	1	The word **behold** emphasizes the events that the author puts next in this verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “And there it was! It was hidden in his tent”
323	7:22	u927		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	טְמוּנָ֛ה בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Achan had hidden it in his tent”
324	7:23	s59g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה	1	This could mean: (1) “where Yahweh could see them.” The idea is not that Yahweh did not know before where they were; he told Joshua in [7:11](../07/11.md) that an Israelite had stolen some of the devoted things and hidden them. Rather, the idea is that this was public evidence that the Israelites had found the wrongdoer and would punish him as Yahweh had told them to. Alternate translation: “where Yahweh could see them” (2) “in front of the tent of meeting.” The phrase could be a description of where the Israelites **poured … out** the silver coins, coat, and gold wedge. The author would be using the name **Yahweh** by association to mean the place where his presence was. But this would also indicate that these things were serving as conclusive evidence against Achan. Alternate translation: “in front of the tent of meeting”
325	7:24	j009		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠כָל־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עִמּ֑⁠וֹ	1	This phrase does not mean that Joshua also brought **all Israel** to the Valley of Achor when he brought Achan there. It means that Joshua and **all Israel with him** brought Achan and his family and possessions to the Valley of Achor. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. The UST models one way to do that.
326	7:24	ta3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	עֵ֥מֶק עָכֽוֹר	1	The word **Achor** is the name of a valley. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. As the next two verses explain, the word means “trouble,” and the Israelites gave that name to the valley on this occasion. Alternate translation: “to the Valley of Trouble”
327	7:25	vd6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מֶ֣ה עֲכַרְתָּ֔⁠נוּ	1	Joshua is using the question form to rebuke Achan. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have troubled us like this!”
328	7:25	ftq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	וַ⁠יִּרְגְּמ֨וּ אֹת֤⁠וֹ כָל־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֶ֔בֶן & וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “And all of Israel stoned him to death … and they stoned them to death”
329	7:25	i3rq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	וַ⁠יִּרְגְּמ֨וּ אֹת֤⁠וֹ כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֶ֔בֶן וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יִּסְקְל֥וּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בָּ⁠אֲבָנִֽים	1	It may be helpful to reorder the last sentence to make it clear that the Israelites **burned** Achan and his family after they **stoned** them. Alternate translation: “And after they had stoned them with stones, then they burned them with fire”
330	7:25	ooc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יִּשְׂרְפ֤וּ אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	It might seem that the expression **burned … with fire** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it or use an expression that would be more natural. Alternate translation: “And they burned them up completely” or “And they set fire to their bodies”
331	7:26	enq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עַ֚ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is there unto this day” or “and it is still there at this time”
332	7:26	zcp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יָּ֥שָׁב יְהוָ֖ה מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפּ֑⁠וֹ	1	See how you translated the phrase “the nose of Yahweh burned” in [7:1](../07/01.md). (Here, the expression **turned from** means “stopped” or “ceased.” Alternate translation: “and Yahweh ceased from his intense anger” or “and Yahweh stopped being so intensely angry”
333	7:26	jg1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	קָרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people call the name of that place”
334	7:26	rp1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	קָרָ֞א שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מָּק֤וֹם הַ⁠הוּא֙	1	It might seem that the expression **the name of that place is called** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “that place is called” or “that place is named” or “people call that place”
335	7:26	wdse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	עֵ֣מֶק עָכ֔וֹר	1	See how you translated the name **the Valley of Achor** in [7:24](../07/24.md).
336	8:intro	f3jc				0	# Joshua 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nJoshua 8:1–29 describes how the Israelites were able to defeat the army of the city of Ai and destroy that city once they had dealt with Achan’s sin of taking plunder from Jericho. Yahweh told the Israelites how to defeat the city by putting some of their soldiers in an ambush.\n\nJoshua 8:30–35 then describes how the Israelites affirmed their covenant with Yahweh at Mount Ebal, just as Moses had told them to do.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### The altar on Mount Ebal\nBy building an altar on Mount Ebal and writing out a copy of the law on the stones, Joshua was fulfilling what Moses had commanded the Israelites in Deuteronomy 11:26–32 and 27:1–26. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in a footnote.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Did Joshua put 30,000 or 5,000 soldiers in the ambush?\nVerses 3–9 seem to describe Joshua sending 30,000 soldiers to lie in ambush to the west of the city of Ai. But verse 12, which seems to be a summary of that same action, says that Joshua sent 5,000 soldiers. Interpreters explain this in different ways. Some say that verse 12 is not actually a summary and Joshua sent out two groups for two different purposes, for example, one to rush into the city and another to guard the flank of the main army or to cut off escaping soldiers. Other interpreters suggest that the original 30,000 soldiers may have realized that there were more of them than were needed for the ambush and that they could not all hide without being seen, so they returned to Joshua, and he sent back only 5,000 of them. Still other interpreters suggest that the number 30,000 could be a copyist’s error and that verse 3 should actually read “5,000.” Whatever the explanation, it is a matter of interpretation rather than translation. The Hebrew text reads “30,000” in verse 3 and “5,000” in verse 12, and we encourage you to translate the text that way.\n\n### Descriptions of relative location\nIn several places in this chapter, the author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. He tells from what direction a person would approach a certain place from the location they were in. In your translation express, this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. For example, in 8:8, you might say “to the west of Ai” rather than “from the west of Ai.”\n
337	8:1	l4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אַל־תִּירָ֣א וְ⁠אַל־תֵּחָ֔ת	1	The phrases **Do not be terrified** and **do not be dismayed** mean similar things. Yahweh is using them together to emphasize that Joshua and the Israelite soldiers must not be afraid. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid at all” or “There is absolutely no reason for you to be terrified”
338	8:1	oogc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠ק֖וּם	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “and get going”
339	8:1	e1c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	עֲלֵ֣ה	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expression **go up** indicates that the Israelite army had to move upward in elevation in order to attack **Ai**. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten such expressions, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “go”
340	8:1	aiwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	רְאֵ֣ה	1	See how you translated the similar use of this word in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
341	8:1	t7bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֗	1	Yahweh is using the past tense in order to refer to something that he will do in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I am about to give into your hand” or “I will certainly give into your hand”
342	8:1	den6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	נָתַ֣תִּי בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֗	1	See how you translated the same expression in [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “I have enabled you to conquer” or “I will enable you to conquer”
343	8:2	h3r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	וְ⁠עָשִׂ֨יתָ לָ⁠עַ֜י וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֗⁠הּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר עָשִׂ֤יתָ לִֽ⁠ירִיחוֹ֙ וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠הּ רַק־שְׁלָלָ֥⁠הּ וּ⁠בְהֶמְתָּ֖⁠הּ תָּבֹ֣זּוּ לָ⁠כֶ֑ם	1	If it would appear in your language that Yahweh was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reverse the order of the clauses so that the exception is stated first and the thing that God required the Israelites to do is stated second. Alternate translation: “Now you may plunder the spoil of Ai and its livestock for yourselves, but otherwise you must do to Ai and its king just as you did to Jericho and its king”
344	8:3	k4uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּוֹרֵ֣י הַ⁠חַ֔יִל	1	See how you translated the phrase **warriors of valor** in [1:14](../01/14.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). Alternate translation: “valiant warriors”`
345	8:4	f2p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	רְ֠אוּ	1	See how you translated the similar use of this word in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “Pay attention”
346	8:4	vacn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וִ⁠הְיִיתֶ֥ם כֻּלְּ⁠כֶ֖ם נְכֹנִֽים	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and all of you shall prepare yourselves”
347	8:5	zlt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֔ה	1	Joshua is using the adjective **first** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the first time” or “at the first time”
348	8:5	a6e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use an equivalent expression to express the meaning, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “before”
349	8:6	itei		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ נָסִ֣ים לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר בָּ⁠רִֽאשֹׁנָ֑ה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For they will say that we are fleeing to their faces, just as at the first”
350	8:7	fw9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠נְתָנָ֛⁠הּ & בְּ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶֽם	1	See how you translated the same expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “will enable you to conquer it”
351	8:8	j021		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	תַּצִּ֤יתוּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִיר֙ בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “you shall set the city on fire” or “you shall burn the city down”
352	8:8	aj5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה	1	Joshua is using the term **word** by association to represent what Yahweh has said by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to what Yahweh has said”
353	8:8	qds9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רְא֖וּ צִוִּ֥יתִי אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם	1	See how you translated the similar use of the word **See** in [6:2](../06/02.md) and earlier in this chapter. Alternate translation: “Pay attention and be sure to do exactly as I have commanded you”
354	8:9	i3lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠יָּ֣ם לָ⁠עָ֑י	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here and several other times in the following verses, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Express these relative locations the way someone in your culture would. Alternate translation: “to the west of Ai”
355	8:12	d5tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּקַּ֕ח כַּ⁠חֲמֵ֥שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֖ים אִ֑ישׁ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם אוֹתָ֜⁠ם אֹרֵ֗ב	1	This statement seems to be a reminder of what Joshua did in [8:3–9](../08/03.md). For a discussion of why [8:3](../08/03.md) says that Joshua sent 30,000 men to lie in ambush while this verse says that he sent **about 5,000 men**, see the General Notes to this chapter.
356	8:13	x0cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/ writing-endofstory	Quote	1	The first sentence in this verse is a summary statement for 8:3–12. Use a natural form in your language for a summary statement at the end of one section of a story. Be sure that it is clear that this is a summary and not a description of a further action.
357	8:14	a0rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ⁠רְא֣וֹת מֶֽלֶךְ־ הָ⁠עַ֗י	1	The author does not say specifically what the king of Ai **saw**. This could mean: (1) that the king saw Joshua. The author has just said that Joshua went and spent the night in the valley near Ai, and the king may have seen him in the morning and concluded that this was the main force of the Israelite army and that he could attack and destroy it. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king of Ai saw Joshua” (2) that the king saw that the Israelite army north of the city. This could be a more general reference to the king seeing that the Israelites had set up their main camp to the north of the city. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king saw the Israelite army”
358	8:14	kov9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַֽ⁠יְמַהֲר֡וּ וַ⁠יַּשְׁכִּ֡ימוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the men of the city **got up early**. Alternate translation: “Then … quickly got up early”
359	8:14	ye1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עַמּ֛⁠וֹ	1	As in [6:5](../06/05.md), the term **people** refers to soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of his soldiers” or “and his whole army”
360	8:16	lcb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּזָּעֲק֗וּ כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ב⁠עיר	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the king summoned all of the people who were in the city”
361	8:16	k8ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙	1	In this context, the phrase **the people** refers to the men who were able to fight. It is clear from [8:24](../08/24.md) that other people remained in the city. Alternate translation: “all of the fighting men”
362	8:16	yt5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּנָּתְק֖וּ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and this drew them away”
363	8:17	kijl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֣ר אִ֗ישׁ בָּ⁠עַי֙ וּ⁠בֵ֣ית אֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹֽא־יָצְא֖וּ אַחֲרֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this sentence as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And every man in Ai and Bethel went out after Israel”
364	8:17	zip6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אִ֗ישׁ	1	Here, the term **man** refers specifically to the men who were able to fight. They left these two cities to pursue the Israelite army. Older men and those unable to fight because of some physical disability probably did not leave these cities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a man of fighting age” or “a man who could fight”
365	8:17	gnnz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בֵ֣ית אֵ֔ל	1	The statement that the fighting men of **Bethel** also pursued the Israelites implicitly suggests that Bethel and Ai were allied cities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “or in its allied city of Bethel”
366	8:17	odgx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יַּעַזְב֤וּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִיר֙ פְּתוּחָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and they left the gates of the city open”
367	8:18	xe2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶ֑⁠נָּה	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I will enable you to conquer it”
368	8:18	b6l6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	נְ֠טֵה בַּ⁠כִּיד֤וֹן אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עַ֔י כִּ֥י בְ⁠יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶ֑⁠נָּה וַ⁠יֵּ֧ט יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ בַּ⁠כִּיד֥וֹן אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠יָד֖⁠וֹ אֶל־הָ⁠עִֽיר	1	This action was a literal sign to Joshua’s soldiers to attack Ai, as the next verse indicates, but it was probably also a symbolic indication that Ai was to be destroyed. You should retain this action in your translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate its meaning in footnote.
369	8:19	cyya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠הָ⁠אוֹרֵ֡ב קָם֩ מְהֵרָ֨ה מִ⁠מְּקוֹמ֤⁠וֹ וַ⁠יָּר֨וּצוּ֙	1	The word **ambush** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people acting together. That is why the pronoun **they** is plural. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you could describe this **ambush** as a group. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite soldiers who were hiding themselves rose quickly from their place, and they ran”
370	8:19	brnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	וַֽ⁠יְמַהֲר֔וּ וַ⁠יַּצִּ֥יתוּ	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **hurried** tells in what way the soldiers from the ambush **burned** the city. Alternate translation: “and they hurriedly burned”
371	8:19	j7b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	וַ⁠יַּצִּ֥יתוּ אֶת־ הָ⁠עִ֖יר בָּ⁠אֵֽשׁ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: “and they set the city on fire”
372	8:20	lcmy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה	1	The author is using the term **behold** to focus attention on what happens next in this story. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
373	8:20	vvzs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠לֹא־הָיָ֨ה בָ⁠הֶ֥ם יָדַ֛יִם לָ⁠נ֖וּס הֵ֣נָּה וָ⁠הֵ֑נָּה	1	Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. This statement seems to introduce the action that the author describes in the rest of this verse and in the next two verses, in which the soldiers from Ai and Bethel become surrounded by the Israelite soldiers. Alternate translation: “and it was not possible for them to flee here or there”
374	8:20	d2dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	הֵ֣נָּה וָ⁠הֵ֑נָּה	1	The author is speaking of two things in order to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “anywhere”
375	8:22	mxej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וְ⁠אֵ֨לֶּה יָצְא֤וּ מִן־הָ⁠עִיר֙ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֔⁠ם וַ⁠יִּֽהְי֤וּ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בַּ⁠תָּ֔וֶךְ	1	The pronoun **these** refers to the Israelite soldiers who had been hiding and who had just set the city of Ai on fire. The pronoun **them** refers to the Israelite soldiers who had openly attacked Ai and then pretended to flee, who had just turned around to attack their enemies. The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who had come out of the cities of Ai and Bethel. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite soldiers who had been hiding and who had just set the city of Ai on fire came out from the city to meet the Israelite soldiers who had just turned around to attack, so the soldiers who had come out of the cities of Ai and Bethel were in the midst of Israel”
376	8:22	dlr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַ⁠יִּֽהְי֤וּ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בַּ⁠תָּ֔וֶךְ אֵ֥לֶּה מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠אֵ֣לֶּה מִ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	The author is using the term **Israel** by association to the Israelite army. It is not significant which instance of **here** refers to which body of Israelite soldiers, the one coming from the city or the one coming back from the wilderness. Alternate translation: “so they were in the midst of Israelite soldiers, some coming at them from one direction and others coming at them from the other direction”
377	8:22	s1lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יַּכּ֣וּ אוֹתָ֔⁠ם עַד־ בִּלְתִּ֥י הִשְׁאִֽיר־ ל֖⁠וֹ	1	After referring to the Israelite soldiers as **they** and the soldiers from Ai and Bethel as **them**, the author then refers to the Israelites as **he** and to their enemies as **him**. This probably reflects the use earlier in the verse of the singular term **Israel** to represent the Israelite soldiers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural pronouns throughout this sentence. Alternate translation: “And they struck them until they left to them no survivor or fugitive”
378	8:24	dura		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֗ה בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּר֙	1	By using the terms **field** and **wilderness** together, the author could be: (1) giving further information about where **the field** was located. Alternate translation: “in the field that was in the wilderness” (2) naming two locations where the Israelite army killed the soldiers from Ai and Bethel. Alternate translation: “in the field and in the wilderness”
379	8:24	uhnh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וַֽ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ כֻלָּ֛⁠ם	1	The author is describing dying in battle by association with the word the word **fallen**, since soldiers who die in battle fall to the ground and die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and all of them had been killed” or “and all of them had died”
380	8:25	d2ud		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠נֹּ֨פְלִ֜ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in the previous verse . Alternate translation: “the ones who were killed”
381	8:25	s6hq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	כֹּ֖ל אַנְשֵׁ֥י הָ⁠עָֽי	1	While the terms **man** and **woman** earlier in the verse have a specific sense, the masculine term **men** here has a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use language in your translation here that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “the entire population of the city”
382	8:26	gcgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ לֹֽא־ הֵשִׁ֣יב יָד֔⁠וֹ	1	The author is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a term that is the opposite of the action he wishes to emphasize. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And Joshua continued holding out his hand”
383	8:27	jyr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	רַ֣ק הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה וּ⁠שְׁלַל֙ הָ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠הִ֔יא בָּזְז֥וּ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	Here, the word **However** is introducing a contrast. What follows the word **However** is in contrast to what the Israelites did to the inhabitants of Ai in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, Israel did plunder for themselves the livestock and the spoil of that city”
384	8:27	agn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה	1	The author is using the term **word** to represent what Yahweh commanded by using words. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to the commandment of Yahweh”
385	8:28	nq1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	שְׁמָמָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desolation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a desolate place”
386	8:29	yq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that remains until this day” or “that is still there at the present time”
387	8:30	isui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	אָ֣ז	1	The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After that” or “After raising a great pile of stones over the corpse of the king of Ai”
388	8:31	td7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כַּ⁠כָּתוּב֙ בְּ⁠סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the book of the law of Moses says” or “as Moses wrote in his book of the law”
389	8:31	ihwd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־ הֵנִ֥יף עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בַּרְזֶ֑ל	1	The law is using the first part of a process to mean that entire process. Picking up an **iron tool** and holding it over a stone is the first step in using that tool to shape the stone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which no one has used an iron tool to shape”
390	8:33	cool		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה ׀ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה ׀ לָ⁠אָר֡וֹן	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Alternate translation: “on both sides of the Box” or “on either side of the Box”
391	8:33	vffb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	חֶצְי⁠וֹ֙ & וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חֶצְי֖⁠וֹ	1	The pronoun **him** in both instances refers to **Israel**, which means all of the Israelites. It may be more natural in your language to use plural pronouns. Alternate translation: “half of them … and half of them”
392	8:33	wd9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁנָֽה	1	The author is using the adjective **first** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he first delivered the law”
393	8:34	vf71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כָּת֖וּב	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that Moses had written”
394	8:35	ym6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹֽא־הָיָ֣ה דָבָ֔ר מִ⁠כֹּ֖ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מֹשֶׁ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹֽא־קָרָ֜א יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative expression. Alternate translation: “Joshua read every word that Moses had commanded”
395	8:35	ozlo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠טַּ֔ף וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּ֖ר	1	The author is making clear that on this occasion, the **assembly of Israel** did not consist only of male representatives of tribes or clans or extended families, but that it also included **women** and **children** and **sojourners**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “including all of the women and children and all of the sojourners”
396	9:intro	w1cx				0	# Joshua 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how the people of the city of Gibeon deceived the Israelites into making a peace treaty with them.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### How the Israelites were deceived\nThe Israelites were deceived because “they did not ask the mouth of Yahweh” (9:14), that is, they did not ask Yahweh for guidance. Instead of consulting Yahweh, they reached conclusions of their own based on what they considered to be reasonable in light of the evidence they had. The Bible says instead, in [Proverbs 3:5](../pro/03/05.md) “Trust in Yahweh with all your heart, and do not lean on your own understanding.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/other/inquire]])\n\n### The Hivites\nIn [3:10](../03/10.md), the Israelites are given a list of the nations that they are told to “dispossess” from the land. This list includes the Hivites. In [9:1-2](../09/01.md), the author of Joshua records that when the kings on the west side of the Jordan River heard what the Israelites had done to Ai that they made an agreement to fight against the Israelites. The list in [9:2](../09/02.md) of kings that agreed to fight against the Israelites includes “the Hivite.” The author records in [9:3-4](../09/03.md) that when “those who dwelled in Gibeon heard what Joshua had done to Jericho and to the Ai … they … acted with cunning.” The author then records in [9:7](../09/07.md) that those who dwelled in Gibeon were “Hivite.” The Hivite nation consisted of multiple people groups, of whom the Gibeonites were just one. This is why the author could say in [9:1-2](../09/01.md) that among the kings who gathered to fight the Israelites were Hivites and also say that the Gibeonites were Hivites.\n\n### “Cut a covenant”\nThe phrase “cut a covenant” occurs several times in this chapter. It means “make a covenant.” The word “cut” is used because in some covenant ceremonies, the participants would cut up animals and then walk between the pieces. This was to indicate, “If I break this covenant, may I be destroyed in this same way.” It is not necessary to understand this background to covenant ceremonies in order to understand the action in this chapter, so you do not have to use the term “cut” in your translation. You could simply say “make,” or you could use an expression from your own language and culture.\n
397	9:1	j011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠עֵ֨בֶר הַ⁠יַּרְדֵּ֜ן	1	The description that follows indicates that by **the other side of the Jordan**, the author means the side opposite to the one from which the Israelites approached the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the west side of the Jordan River”
398	9:1	j022		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הָ֣⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי	1	The author is not referring to specific individuals. He is describing the people groups that these **kings** ruled. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “that is, the kings of the Hittites, Amorites, Canaanites, Perizzites, Hivites, and Jebusites”
399	9:2	uj94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	פֶּ֖ה אֶחָֽד	1	The author is using a common expression of his culture, **as one mouth**, to mean “by unanimous agreement.” (All the kings said the same thing, that they would fight the Israelites, so it was as if together they only had one mouth.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by unanimous agreement”
400	9:4	r5yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַ⁠יַּעֲשׂ֤וּ גַם־ הֵ֨מָּה֙ בְּ⁠עָרְמָ֔ה	1	The word **also** does not indicate that the other kings had acted **with cunning** and the people of Gibeon did the same. Rather, the idea is that the other kings acted by joining forces to fight the Israelites, and the people of Gibeon **also** acted, but **with cunning** rather than by fighting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. “And they also took action, but unlike the other kings, they did not prepare to fight; they used cunning”
401	9:4	aktq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠עָרְמָ֔ה	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **cunning**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “craftily”
402	9:5	q9v6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	נִקֻּדִֽים	1	This word could mean (1) **moldy**, as in the ULT, here and in [9:12](../09/12.md). (2) **crumbs**. Alternate translation: “crumbs”
403	9:6	rz8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	אִ֣ישׁ יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	The author is not referring to a specific **man**. He means the men **of Israel** in general and, as verses 15 and 18–21 indicate, most likely the leaders of Israel. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Israel”
404	9:6	uh11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated in [1:2](../01/02.md) this expression that people of this time used to introduce the main business of a message.
405	9:6	mo5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּרְתוּ־לָ֥⁠נוּ בְרִֽית	1	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “make a covenant with us”
406	9:7	m0h0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	אִֽישׁ־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	See how you translated the same expression in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Israel”
407	9:7	ojg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-genericnoun	הַ⁠חִוִּ֑י	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Hivites**. He means the Gibeonite messengers, who were Hivites. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “these Hivites”
408	9:7	t1r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וְ⁠אֵ֖יךְ אֶֽכְרָת־ לְ⁠ךָ֥ בְרִֽית	1	The Israelite leaders are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “In that case, we could not cut a covenant with you!”
409	9:8	ki9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עֲבָדֶ֣י⁠ךָ אֲנָ֑חְנוּ	1	By saying **We are your servants**, the Gibeonites do not mean that they are willing to become slaves, such as they eventually do become in this episode. Rather, they are agreeing to let Joshua be their ruler. They mean implicitly that they will accept the terms he specifies, such as paying tribute. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “We are willing to serve you as our ruler”
410	9:9	mrhs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	מֵ⁠אֶ֨רֶץ רְחוֹקָ֤ה מְאֹד֙ בָּ֣אוּ עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ לְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the name of Yahweh your God, your servants have come from a very distant land”
411	9:9	kvs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ	1	To show respect to Joshua, the Gibeonites are speaking about themselves in the third person. They are not assuming that he has already agreed to let them serve him as their ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “We, your servants”
412	9:9	yve3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָ֣ה	1	Here, as in [7:9](../07/09.md), Yahweh’s **name** represents his reputation. Alternate translation: “because of the reputation of Yahweh”
413	9:10	p9ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בְּ⁠עַשְׁתָּרֽוֹת	1	The word **Ashtaroth** is the name of the capital city of **Bashan**. If you have already translated the book of Deuteronomy, see how you translated this name in [Deuteronomy 1:4](../01/04.md).
414	9:11	xd47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר קְח֨וּ בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם צֵידָה֙ לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ וּ⁠לְכ֖וּ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם אֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙	1	If your language would not use a direct quotation inside of a direct quotation, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and told us to take provisions in our hand for the road and go to meet you and say to you”
415	9:11	hq3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם	1	The Gibeonites and their leaders were using one part of a person, his **hand**, to represent all of him in the act of bringing something with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with you”
416	9:11	z823		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ	1	The people of Gibeon are speaking of the men’s journey by association with **the road** on which they would walk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your journey”
417	9:11	i2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	קְח֨וּ בְ⁠יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם צֵידָה֙ לַ⁠דֶּ֔רֶךְ וּ⁠לְכ֖וּ לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם אֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙ עַבְדֵי⁠כֶ֣ם אֲנַ֔חְנוּ וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה כִּרְתוּ־לָ֥⁠נוּ בְרִֽית	1	If your language would not use a third-level direct quotation (a quotation inside a quotation inside a quotation), you could translate this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that we were your servants and that we wanted you to cut a covenant with us”
418	9:12	bwk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	הִנֵּ֣ה	1	In this context, the Gibeonites are using the term **behold** to mean that they want the Israelites to look at their bread. Alternate translation: “look at it”
419	9:13	yyy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֖ה	1	The Gibeonites are using the word **behold** here in the same way as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “look at it”
420	9:13	np0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠דֶּ֖רֶךְ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “our journey”
421	9:14	c4ao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּקְח֥וּ הָֽ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֖ים מִ⁠צֵּידָ֑⁠ם	1	This could mean: (1) that the Israelite leaders tasted the provisions of the Gibeonites to see whether they were old. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite leaders tasted their provisions” (2) that they **took** some of these provisions out of the Gibeonites’ baggage to examine them. Alternate translation: “And the Israelite leaders examined their provisions”
422	9:14	o4z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	פִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה	1	The author is using Yahweh’s **mouth** to represent Yahweh himself in the act of guiding or giving counsel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh to guide them” or “Yahweh to counsel them”
423	9:15	v90y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ שָׁל֔וֹם	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Joshua agreed that the Israelite people would have a peaceful relationship with the Gibeonite people”
424	9:16	t8q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	מִ⁠קְצֵה֙ שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת יָמִ֔ים	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:11](../01/11.md). Translate this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “a couple of days later”
425	9:16	hvn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁמְע֗וּ כִּי־ קְרֹבִ֥ים הֵם֙ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו וּ⁠בְ⁠קִרְבּ֖⁠וֹ הֵ֥ם יֹשְׁבִֽים	1	The phrases **they were near to them** and **they were dwelling among them** mean basically the same thing. The author says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that the Gibeonites lived close to the Israelites. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they actually lived close to them!”
426	9:17	s1u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, but your culture reckons the present day as day one, you could use a cardinal number here. Otherwise, see how you translated the similar expressions in [1:11](../01/11.md) and [9:16](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “on day three” or “after traveling for two days”
427	9:17	q18q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠הַ⁠כְּפִירָ֔ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֖וֹת וְ⁠קִרְיַ֥ת יְעָרִֽים	1	**Kephirah**, **Beeroth**, and **Kiriath Jearim** are the names of cities that were subject to the king of the city of Gibeon.
428	9:18	c632		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠לֹ֤א הִכּוּ⁠ם֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּֽי־נִשְׁבְּע֤וּ לָ⁠הֶם֙ נְשִׂיאֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עֵדָ֔ה בַּֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the leaders of the congregation had sworn to them by Yahweh the God of Israel, the sons of Israel did not strike them”
429	9:19	vrwa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ נִשְׁבַּ֣עְנוּ	1	For emphasis, the **leaders** are stating a pronoun whose meaning is already present in the verb translated as **sworn**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **ourselves**.
430	9:19	z1k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	לֹ֥א נוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠נְגֹּ֥עַ בָּ⁠הֶֽם	1	In context such as this, the word translated as **touch** has the sense of “harm” or “kill.” In some languages, this may sound like an understatement for emphasis, and you could express the meaning that way. Alternate translation: “we cannot do the slightest thing to harm them”
431	9:20	ak2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֤ה עָלֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ קֶ֔צֶף	1	The leaders mean implicitly that they do not want the **wrath** of Yahweh to be **upon** them, that is, they do not want Yahweh to be angry with them and punish them for breaking their **oath**. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “so Yahweh will not be angry with us and punish us”
432	9:21	wg7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	וַ֠⁠יִּֽהְיוּ חֹטְבֵ֨י עֵצִ֤ים וְ⁠שֹֽׁאֲבֵי־ מַ֨יִם֙ לְ⁠כָל־ הָ֣⁠עֵדָ֔ה	1	Some versions treat this phrase as a continuation of what the leaders said to the congregation. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to make this part of the quotation from the leaders if it does. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to end the quotation before this phrase, as the ULT does.
433	9:22	ylp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר רְחוֹקִ֨ים אֲנַ֤חְנוּ מִ⁠כֶּם֙ מְאֹ֔ד	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that you are very far from us”
434	9:23	kam4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated this expression, which introduces the main business of a communication, in [1:2](../01/02.md) and its other occurrences.
435	9:23	b8vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֲרוּרִ֣ים אַתֶּ֑ם	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Yahweh has cursed you”
436	9:23	f0kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	וְ⁠לֹֽא־ יִכָּרֵ֨ת מִ⁠כֶּ֜ם עֶ֗בֶד וְ⁠חֹטְבֵ֥י עֵצִ֛ים וְ⁠שֹֽׁאֲבֵי־ מַ֖יִם	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **cut off**, which in this context means “cease to be.” Alternate translation: “and each of you shall always be a slave who hews wood and draws water”
437	9:23	ozk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִכָּרֵ֨ת מִ⁠כֶּ֜ם עֶ֗בֶד	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And we will not cut off any of you from being a slave”
438	9:24	s17h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	הֻגֵּ֨ד הֻגַּ֤ד לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	The Gibeonites are repeating the verb **declared** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it was clearly declared to your servants”
439	9:24	wq4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כִּי֩ הֻגֵּ֨ד הֻגַּ֤ד לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people clearly declared to your servants”
440	9:24	mjzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	To show respect to Joshua, the Gibeonites are speaking humbly about themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants”
441	9:24	wuz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	לָ⁠כֶם֙ & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם & מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The first two instances of **your** are singular because the Gibeonites are addressing Joshua. The other two instances of **your** and the word **you** are plural because the Gibeonites are referring to the Israelites as a group. Use the corresponding forms in your translation if your language marks this distinction.
442	9:24	kbti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם	1	The Gibeonites are using one part of the Israelite people, their **faces**, to represent all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of you”
443	9:25	h9nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה	1	See how you translated the same expression in [9:23](../09/23.md).
444	9:25	enss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	הִנְ⁠נ֣וּ בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ	1	See how you translated the same expression in [2:18](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “we are in your hand”
445	9:25	im6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ	1	Here, the **hand** represents the power or control that a person has over someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your control” or “under your control”
446	9:25	a5un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	כַּ⁠טּ֨וֹב וְ⁠כַ⁠יָּשָׁ֧ר	1	The terms **good** and **right** mean similar things. The author is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “as is most appropriate”
447	9:25	octw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֛י⁠ךָ	1	The Gibeonites are using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents judgment and perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your perspective” or “in your judgment”
448	9:26	zymn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וַ⁠יַּצֵּ֥ל אוֹתָ֛⁠ם מִ⁠יַּ֥ד בְּנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	The author is using one part of the **sons of Israel**, their **hand**, to represent all of them in the potential act of killing the Gibeonites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And he delivered them so that the sons of Israel did not kill them”
449	9:27	p81s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עַד־הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	See how you translated the phrase **until this day** in [4:9](../04/09.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “right up to this time”
450	10:intro	uy1f				0	# Joshua 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how other Canaanite kings attacked the city of Gibeon because it was a great city and they were concerned that its people had allied themselves with the Israelites. The chapter also describes how Joshua and the Israelite army went and defended the city and defeated its attackers (10:1–27).\n\nThe chapter then describes how Joshua and the Israelite army went and defeated and destroyed each of the cities whose kings had attacked Gibeon, the cities of Makkedah, Libnah, Lachish, Eglon, Hebron, and Debir (10:28–43).\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 10:12–13 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a poem.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Complete destruction of cities\nThe war that the Israelites fought against the Canaanites was different from other wars. Yahweh gave Israel special instructions about how they were to deal with the people they defeated, including completely destroying them and their cities. These were unique circumstances, and armies today are not supposed to act in the same way.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “devoted”\nThe specialized term that the ULT translates as “devoted” occurs several times in this chapter. See the discussion of that term in the General Introduction to Joshua, and see the UST for an expression of its meaning in the specific contexts where it is used in this chapter.\n\n### “to the mouth of the sword”\nThis expression occurs several times in this chapter, often in connection with the term “devoted.” See the discussion of this expression in the General Introduction to Joshua, and see how the UST represents its meaning.\n\n### “come up,” “went up”\n\nAs the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, Hebrew writers marked travel descriptions for change in elevation. The author follows this usage in several places in this chapter. If your language does not mark travel notices for change in elevation, you can translate these expressions more simply For example, in 10:6 you might have the Gibeonites say simply “come to us” rather than “come up to us.”\n
451	10:1	k9p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Adoni Zedek	1	The words **Adoni Zedek** is the name of a man.
452	10:1	m2j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and had devoted it	1	See the discussion of the term **devoted** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “and had completely destroyed it”
453	10:2	r5h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	that they feared greatly	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. This first phrase would then be at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “then they feared greatly”
454	10:2	p7w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	that they feared greatly	1	The pronoun **they** refers both to the king of Jerusalem, mentioned in the previous verse, and to the people who lived in that city. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem and their king feared greatly”
455	10:2	a3f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the cities of the kingdom	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the cities that a king ruled”
456	10:3	n6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Hoham & Piram & Japhia & Debir	1	The words **Hoham**, **Piram**, **Japhia**, and **Debir** are the names of men.
457	10:3	h8m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jarmuth & Lachish & Eglon	1	The words **Jarmuth**, **Lachish**, and **Eglon** are the names of cities.
458	10:4	e2v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Come up	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the expression **Come up** indicates that these kings and their armies would have to travel upward in elevation in order to reach Jerusalem. If your language does not mark travel expressions for elevation, you could shorten such expressions, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “Come”
459	10:4	r9t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	and let us strike Gibeon, because it has made peace with Joshua and with the sons of Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because Gibeon has made peace with Joshua and with the sons of Israel, let us strike it”
460	10:5	g4x8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form, here and in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
461	10:5	m7y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their camps	1	The author is using the term **camps** by association to mean the armies that stayed in camps during military campaigns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their armies”
462	10:6	m5k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Do not let your hands drop from your servants	1	The men of Gibeon are speaking as if Joshua had his **hands** around them but might let his hands **drop** so that he was no longer holding them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not stop helping your servants”
463	10:6	p2h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	from your servants	1	The men of Gibeon are speaking about themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “from us”
464	10:6	r3w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Come up to us quickly and save us and help us, because all of the kings of the Amorite dwelling {in} the hill country have gathered against us	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because all of the kings of the Amorites dwelling in the hill country have gathered against us, come up to us quickly and help us and save us”
465	10:6	e7n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	and save us and help us	1	The author is describing one event before describing another event that would precede it. In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they would happen. Alternate translation: “and help us and save us”
466	10:8	r6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not be afraid of them, because I have given them into your hand	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “I have given them into your hand, so do not be afraid of them”
467	10:8	p8t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	I have given them into your hand	1	Yahweh is using the past tense to describe something that is going to happen in the future in order to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will certainly give them into your hand”
468	10:8	m9x5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	into your hand	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the author is using the term **hand** by association to mean power or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and in the rest of the chapter. Alternate translation: “into your power”
469	10:8	s4h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	will stand at your face	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “will be able to resist you”
470	10:10	w2y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	and he struck them {with} a great striking	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “and he struck them severely”
471	10:10	n7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Beth Horon & Azekah & Makkedah	1	The words **Beth Horon**, **Azekah**, and **Makkedah** are the names of cities.
472	10:11	s5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	in their fleeing from the face of Israel	1	The author is using the expression **from the face of** by association to mean “in front of.” Since the fleeing enemies were in front of the Israelites, the Israelites were behind them, and it may be more natural in your language to express the meaning that way. Alternate translation: “as they were fleeing, with the Israelites pursuing closely behind them”
473	10:11	e9v4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	great stones from the heavens	1	As the author indicates later in the verse, these were not **stones** in the sense of rocks, but **hail** stones. It may be helpful to indicate this explicitly in your translation at this point in the verse. Alternate translation: “great hailstones from the sky”
474	10:12	i3k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	in the day of Yahweh giving the Amorite to the face of the sons of Israel	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Yahweh enabled the Israelites to defeat the Amorites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Yahweh enabled the sons of Israel to defeat the Amorites”
475	10:12	g5n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means all of these Amorites who opposed Joshua. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites” or “these Amorites”
476	10:12	m8p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the eyes of Israel	1	The author is using the term **eyes** by association to mean witnessing or watching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “while the Israelites watched”
477	10:12	e2h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, over the Valley of Aijalon	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, be still over the Valley of Aijalon”
478	10:12	i7t3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Sun, be still over Gibeon, and moon, over the Valley of Aijalon	1	Since the author says that here **Joshua spoke to Yahweh**, and since Joshua by himself did not have the power to stop the sun and moon from moving through the sky, this is implicitly a prayer or request from Joshua to Yahweh. You may wish to translate it that way. Alternate translation: “Please make the sun be still over Gibeon and make the moon be still over the Valley of Aijalon” or “May the sun be still over Gibeon, and may the moon be still over the Valley of Aijalon”
479	10:13	r4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Is it not written in the Book of Jashar?	1	The author is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “This account is indeed written in the Book of Jashar.”
480	10:13	p9w2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Is it not written in the Book of Jashar?	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “One can read about this in the Book of Jashar”
481	10:13	n5h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	the Book of Jashar	1	The word **Jashar** is the name of a book. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a word or phrase from your language that expresses the meaning of this name. Alternate translation: “the book of Yasher” or “the Book of the Upright One”
482	10:13	h2m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	and it did not hurry to go	1	The author is expressing a single idea by using two verbs together. The word **hurry** tells in what way the sun did not **go**. Alternate translation: “and it did not go quickly”
483	10:14	r8f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	And none has been like this day & for Yahweh fought for Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “So Yahweh fought for Israel, and as a result, no other day has ever been like this one”
484	10:14	i6n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	to the face of it	1	The author is using a common expression that describes something coming before something else in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before it”
485	10:14	m3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	for Yahweh listening to the voice of a man	1	The author is using the term **voice** by association to mean what Joshua said by using his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for Yahweh doing what a human being asked him to do”
486	10:17	p7k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	And it was told to Joshua	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And someone told Joshua”
487	10:17	p2m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	The five kings have been found	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We have found the five kings”
488	10:19	y4h7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	But you	1	The word **you** is plural here because Joshua is addressing all of soldiers other than the ones who will stay and guard the cave. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Alternate translation: “But all of the rest of you”
489	10:19	d8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	do not stand	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **stand**, which would be negative in this context. Alternate translation: “keep moving”
490	10:19	r5t9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not let them enter into their cities, because Yahweh your God has given them into your hand	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since Yahweh your God has given them into your hand, do not let them enter into their cities”
491	10:19	p6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	Yahweh your God has given them into your hand	1	Joshua is using the past tense to describe something that will happen in the future in order to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Yahweh your God will certainly give them into your hand”
492	10:20	w3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	striking them {with} a very great striking	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:10](../10/10.md). Alternate translation: “striking them very severely”
493	10:20	a7h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the cities of fortification	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fortification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their fortified cities”
494	10:21	a2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	in peace	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “peacefully”
495	10:21	m5t6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	No one sharpened his tongue	1	The author is speaking as if people could **sharpen** their **tongues**. He means that no one used his tongue as if it were a weapon to attack the Israelites by saying something hostile to them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one said anything hostile”
496	10:21	e8p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	against a man	1	The author means implicitly that no one spoke against even a single Israelite. Alternate translation: “not even against any single one of them”
497	10:22	j026		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Open the mouth of the cave	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that this means to remove the stones that were blocking the entrance to the cave. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Remove the large stones that have been sealing the opening of the cave”
498	10:24	e9m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	called to every man of Israel	1	By **man**, the author means implicitly the soldiers who had fought in the battle. Alternate translation: “summoned the whole Israelite army”
499	10:24	s7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	put your feet on the necks of these kings	1	Putting a foot on the neck of an enemy was a symbolic action that showed complete victory over that enemy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. The UST models one way to do this.
500	10:25	r3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Do not be afraid and do not be dismayed. Be strong and be courageous, because Yahweh will do thus to all of your enemies with whom you {are} fighting	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will do the same thing to all of your enemies whom you are fighting, so do not be afraid or dismayed, but be strong and courageous”
501	10:25	p6t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Do not be afraid and do not be dismayed	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Do not be at all fearful”
502	10:25	p9k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Be strong and be courageous	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Be completely courageous”
503	10:27	e5h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	unto this same day	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they are still there unto this same day”
504	10:27	i8m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	unto this same day	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “and they are still there right up to this time”
505	10:28	p8m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	He devoted them and every soul that {was} in it. He did not leave a survivor.	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. For help in translating these phrases here and in the rest of this chapter, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed everyone who was in it”
506	10:28	e3n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	He devoted them and every soul that {was} in it	1	The author assumes that readers will know that in this context, the term **devoted** describes complete destruction. See the discussion of the term in the General Introduction to Joshua. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed them and every person who was in it”
507	10:28	p5h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	He devoted them	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the city of Makkedah and its king. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “He completely destroyed the city and its king”
508	10:28	s7t2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	and every soul that {was} in it	1	The author is using part of a person, his **soul**, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and every person who was in it”
509	10:32	o4m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	on the second day	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day two” or “the next day”
510	10:39	i6r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Just as he had done to Hebron, thus he did to Debir and to its king, and just as he had done to Libnah and to its king	1	Since the author has already described what Joshua did to Hebron and Libnah, it may be more natural in your language to present this information first. Alternate translation: “Just as he had done to Hebron, and just as he had done to Libnah and to its king, thus he did to Debir and to its king”
511	10:40	p3w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	and all of their kings	1	The pronoun **their** refers to all the regions just listed: the hill country, the Negev, the lowland, and the slopes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “and all the kings of these regions”
512	10:41	j023		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Goshen	1	The word **Goshen** is the name of a region. This is not the same region as the one called Goshen in the book of Exodus. As the context shows, this region was near the city of Gibeon, and it may have gotten its name because it contained a city called Goshen.
513	10:40	e8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	every breathing thing	1	The author assumes that readers will know that the phrase **every breathing thing** includes human beings but not animals. He states this directly in [11:14](../11/14.md). You could indicate this explicitly here in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “every human being”
514	10:42	r5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	And Joshua captured all of these kings and their land at one time, because Yahweh, the God of Israel, fought for Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because Yahweh, the God of Israel, fought for Israel, Joshua was able to capture all of these kings and their land at one time”
515	11:intro	g8mw				0	# Joshua 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how the Israelites fought a great battle near the city of Merom and defeated a coalition of the armies of the kings who ruled cities in the northern part of the land of Canaan.\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Why did Joshua not burn the cities that had been built on mounds?\nJoshua 11:13 says that while Joshua and the Israelite army burned down most of the cities they conquered, they did not burn any of the cities that had been built on mounds or hills except for Hazor. This was probably because the elevated location of those cities offered them a strategic advantage. They probably already had defensive walls. So Yahweh allowed them to live in those cities, where they would be safer and more secure from attack. It is not necessary to put anything about this in the text of your translation, but you could explain it in a footnote.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “devoted,” “to the mouth of the sword”\nThe author uses these expressions several times in this chapter. See the discussion if them in the General Introduction to Joshua.\n
516	11:1	n5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jabin & Jobab	1	The words **Jabin** and **Jobab** are the names of men.
517	11:1	n8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Hazor & Madon & Shimron & Achshaph	1	The words **Hazor**, **Madon**, **Shimron**, and **Achshaph** are the names of cities.
518	11:1	e3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	heard	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “heard about what Joshua had done”
519	11:2	n7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Kinnereth	1	The word **Kinnereth** is the name of a lake.
520	11:2	n2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Dor	1	The word **Dor** is the name of a city.
521	11:3	m4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise and from the sea	1	The author is using the terms **sunrise** and **sea** by association to mean the eastern and western directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the east and from the west”
522	11:3	r8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	from the sunrise and from the sea	1	The author is speaking of two extremes in order to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole land”
523	11:3	g3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Canaanite & and the Amorite and the Hittite and the Perizzite and the Jebusite & and the Hivite	1	The author is not referring to specific individuals from these people groups. He means these peoples in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites … and the Amorites, Hittites, Perizzites, and Jebusites … and the Hivites”
524	11:4	j029		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their camps	1	The author is using the term **camps** by association to mean the armies that were camped in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their armies”
525	11:4	g2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	and a horse and a chariot, very many	1	The author is not referring to a specific **horse** or **chariot**. He means horses and chariots in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “and many horses and chariots”
526	11:5	j034		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Merom	1	The word **Merom** is the name of a lake.
527	11:6	s8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	from their faces	1	The author is using one part of people, their **faces**, to mean entire people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of them”
528	11:6	i3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I will give all of them slain to the face of Israel	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:12](../10/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will enable you to slay all of them”
529	11:6	u7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	You will hamstring their horses	1	A hamstring is a tendon behind the knee that enables a person or animal to walk and run. To **hamstring** a horse means to cut this tendon to disable the horse permanently. If your readers would not be familiar with what this means, in your translation you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “You will disable their horses permanently”
530	11:7	j086		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and they fell upon them	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that the Israelites attacked their enemies suddenly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they attacked them suddenly”
531	11:8	m8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And Yahweh gave them into the hand of Israel	1	See how you translated the same expression in [10:8](../10/08.md) and its other occurrences in Chapter 10.
532	11:8	j033		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Misrephoth Maim	1	The expression **Misrephoth Maim** is the name of a place.
533	11:8	j030		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise	1	The author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the eastern direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the east”
534	11:8	p2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	until he did not leave to them a survivor	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Joshua. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “until Joshua did not leave any of them alive”
535	11:10	j027		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and struck its king with the sword	1	The author means more than that Joshua simply **struck** this **king** with his **sword**. The author assumes that readers will understand that this means Joshua killed the king. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and killed its king”
536	11:10	j031		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	the head of all of these kingdoms	1	The author is speaking as if Hazor were the **head** of a body made up of these kingdoms. He means that it was the most important city and controlled the others. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the city that controlled all of these kingdoms**
537	11:11	s3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	soul	1	The author is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “person”
538	11:11	e2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Not any breathing thing remained	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [10:40](../10/40.md). You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “No person remained alive”
539	11:13	j072		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	Only all of the cities standing on their mound, Israel did not burn, except Hazor alone Joshua burned	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “The only one of the cities standing on their mounds that Joshua burned was Hazor; Israel did not burn any of the others”
540	11:13	c8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	their mound	1	Since the author is referring to multiple mounds (one for each city), it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form. Alternate translation: “their mounds”
541	11:13	j037		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	all of the cities standing on their mound, Israel did not burn	1	The author does not say explicitly why Joshua did not **burn** such cities. For a likely explanation, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. You could indicate the reason explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. The UST models one way to do that.
542	11:14	e7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	They did not leave any breathing thing	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:11](../11/11.md). Alternate translation: “No person remained alive”
543	11:15	m2m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	He did not turn aside a thing from all that Yahweh had commanded Moses	1	The author is speaking as if Joshua’s obedience to Yahweh were a journey that he could **turn aside** from. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He did everything that Yahweh had commanded Moses”
544	11:16	n4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Goshen	1	This is the name of the same region mentioned in [10:41](../10/41.md). This is not the region called Goshen in the book of Exodus.
545	11:17	j035		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Mount Halak	1	The expression **Mount Halak** is the name of a mountain.
546	11:17	n3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Baal Gad	1	The expression **Baal Gad** is the name of a town.
547	11:17	d7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	and struck them and killed them	1	The terms **struck** and **killed** mean similar things. The author is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “and killed every one of them”
548	11:18	j028		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Many days	1	The author is using the term **days** by association to mean time, since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “For a long time”
549	11:19	p8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	There was not a city that made peace with the sons of Israel except the Hivites, the dwellers of Gibeon	1	The author is speaking of a **city** as if it were a living thing that could make peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There was not a city whose people made peace with the sons of Israel except Gibeon, whose dwellers were Hivites”
550	11:19	j025		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	There was not a city that made peace with the sons of Israel except the Hivites, the dwellers of Gibeon	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Gibeon, whose dwellers were Hivites, was the only city whose people made peace with the Israelites”
551	11:19	a3t5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	that made peace	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that agreed to live peacefully”
552	11:20	m7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to harden their hearts to meet Israel {in} battle	1	The author is speaking as if these people’s **hearts** were something that could become physically hard. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make them determined to fight against Israel”
553	11:20	j024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	in order to devote them & in order to destroy them	1	The author means implicitly that the Israelites would do these things. Alternate translation: “so that the Israelites would devote them … so that the Israelites would destroy them”
554	11:20	a4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	so that there would not be favor for them	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that no one would treat them favorably”
555	11:21	i8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and cut off the Anakites from the hill country, from Hebron, from Debir, from Anab, and from all of the hill country of Judah, and from all of the hill country of Israel	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that Joshua removed the Anakites from these places by killing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and killed all the Anakites who lived in the hill country, in Hebron, in Debir, in Anab, and in all of the hill country of Judah, and in all of the hill country of Israel”
556	11:21	j032		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Debir & Anab	1	The words **Debir** and **Anab** are the names of cities.
557	11:23	j036		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	And the land rested from war	1	The author is speaking of **land** as if it were a living thing that could rest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And there was no more war in the land”
558	11:23	j038		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּתְּנָ⁠הּ֩ יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ לְ⁠נַחֲלָ֧ה לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל כְּ⁠מַחְלְקֹתָ֖⁠ם לְ⁠שִׁבְטֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1	The author does not mean that Joshua assigned the land to smaller **divisions** within the Israelite **tribes**. He is using the phrase **according to their divisions** implicitly to mean that Joshua divided up the land among the tribes. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And Joshua divided it up among the tribes and gave it to Israel for an inheritance”
559	11:23	j039		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לְ⁠נַחֲלָ֧ה	1	The author is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as a lasting possession”
560	12:intro	ga6k				0	# Joshua 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter provides a summary of the kings whom Joshua and the Israelites conquered.\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 12:2–5 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are part of a long list.\n
561	12:1	k3n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now these {are} the kings of the land	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here the author begins to provide background information about how the Israelites divided up the land they conquered. This background information continues through Chapter 21. In this chapter, the author provides a summary of all the territories the Israelites conquered. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
562	12:1	m4p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, from the rising of the sun	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout the following chapters, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. He means here that if someone were traveling from the territories he is about to describe to the area where most of the Israelites settled, he would be coming **from the rising of the sun**, that is, from the east. In your translation, express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “to the east of the Jordan River”
563	12:1	n9x4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the direction where the sun rises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan River”
564	12:2	e5j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Sihon, the king of the Amorite	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “The territory of Sihon, the king of the Amorite”
565	12:2	g2p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Amorite**. He means Amorites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
566	12:2	i7k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ruling from Aroer, which {is} on the lip of the wadi of Arnon, and the middle of the wadi and half of Gilead and unto the Jabbok wadi, the border of the sons of Ammon,	1	Since the expression **half of Gilead** summarizes what the rest of the verse says, it may be more natural in your language to put this expression at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “ruling from the middle of the wadi of Arnon, including Aroer on the lip of the wadi, and unto the Jabbok wadi, the border of the sons of Ammon; in all, half of Gilead”
567	12:2	n3m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Aroer	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the word **Aroer** is the name of a city, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
568	12:2	j052		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	lip	1	The author is speaking as if this **wadi** were something that had a **lip**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “edge”
569	12:3	i2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	and the Arabah unto the Sea of Kinnereth from the sunrise and unto the Sea of the Arabah	1	Since the expression **from the sunrise** applies to **the Arabah**, it may be more natural in your language to put the\\ose expressions together. Alternate translation: “and the Arabah from the sunrise from the Sea of Kinnereth to the Sea of the Arabah” or “and the Arabah east of the Jordan River, from the Sea of Kinnereth to the Sea of the Arabah”
570	12:3	n6p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Sea of the Arabah, the Sea of Salt	1	The words **Sea of the Arabah** and **Sea of Salt** are both names for what is now known as “the Dead Sea.”
571	12:3	i4k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	the way of Beth Jeshimoth	1	The author is using a common expression to refer to the direction of travel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the way one would travel to get to Beth Jeshimoth”
572	12:4	m3k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the border of Og	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory within borders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the territory of Og”
573	12:4	e6n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And the border of Og	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And the Israelites also possessed the territory of Og”
574	12:5	e9m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and half of Gilead, the border of Sihon, the king of Heshbon	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and he ruled over half of Gilead, as far as the border with Sihon, the king of Heshbon”
575	12:6	p4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	them & it	1	The pronoun **them** refers to the kings mentioned previously, and **it** refers to their land. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those kings … their land”
576	12:7	m7n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, toward the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the expression **toward the sea** by association to mean in the direction of the Mediterranean Sea from his location, that is, the west. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the west side of the Jordan”
577	12:7	n2p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	from Baal Gad & Mount Halak	1	See how you translated these names in [11:17](../11/17.md).
578	12:7	e4m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And Joshua gave it to the tribes of Israel {as} a possession according to their divisions	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:23](../11/23.md). Alternate translation: “And Joshua divided it up among the tribes and gave it to Israel as a possession”
579	12:8	e8k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	the Hittite, the Amorite, and the Canaanite, the Perizzite, the Hivite, and the Jebusite	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “these were the lands of the Hittite, the Amorite, and the Canaanite, the Perizzite, the Hivite, and the Jebusite”
580	12:9	n6m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jerusalem & Hebron	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the kings in [12:9–24](../12/09.md) are all identified by the names of the cities they ruled. Alternate translation: “the city of Jerusalem … the city of Hebron”
581	12:23	e5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the king of the nations in Gilgal	1	This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “the king who ruled the people groups in the region of Gilgal” (2) Alternate translation: “the king of the city of Goyim in Gilgal”
582	13:intro	zl7s				0	# Joshua 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nIn this chapter, the author begins to describe how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. (This description continues through Chapter 21.) This chapter summarizes the land that remained for the Israelites to conquer (13:1–7) and reviews how Moses distributed the land the Israelites conquered east of the Jordan River to some of the tribes (13:8–32).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
583	13:1	b4n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now Joshua had aged and had come into days	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here the author begins to describe specifically how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites had conquered. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
584	13:1	d5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	had aged and had come into days & You have aged, you have come into days	1	The expressions **had aged** and **had come into days** mean similar things. The author is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “was very old … You are now very old”
585	13:2	j053		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and all of the Geshurite	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and all of the territories of the Geshurite”
586	13:2	g3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Geshurite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Geshurite**. He means Geshurites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Geshurites”
587	13:3	n4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Shihor	1	The word **Shihor** is the name of a river.
588	13:3	m7p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	which {is} at the face of Egypt	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean border. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “which is the border with Egypt”
589	13:3	m2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the border of Ekron	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory of Ekron”
590	13:3	p6k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be Canaanite territory”
591	13:3	e8m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	The Philistines and Geshurites were not Canaanites. You could indicate that explicitly in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be Canaanite territory, even though the Philistines and Geshurites are not Canaanites”
592	13:3	m5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	it shall be reckoned to the Canaanite	1	The author is using the term **Canaanite** by association to mean territory that Yahweh wants the Israelites to conquer, since he had told them to conquer all Canaanite territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you shall consider this to be territory that I want you to conquer and possess, even though the Philistines and Geshurites are not Canaanites”
593	13:3	e2p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	the five lords of the Philistines	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “it includes the territories of the five lords of the Philistines”
594	13:4	e9k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	from the south	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the Avvites to the south of the Philistines and Geshurites”
595	13:4	n3m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Arah & Aphek	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the words **Arah** and **Aphek** are the names of cities, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
596	13:5	n7p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Gebalite	1	The word **Gebalite** was the name for someone who lived in the city of Gebal, which was also known as Byblos.
597	13:5	m4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from the rising of the sun	1	The author is using the expression **the rising of the sun** by association to mean the east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the east”
598	13:6	j059		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	You shall only cause it to fall	1	The author is using the term **fall** by association to mean divide by lot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You shall only divide it by lot”
599	13:6	m2p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	as an inheritance	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, Yahweh is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. See how you translated the similar expressions in [11:23](../11/23.md) and [12:7](../12/07.md). Alternate translation: “as a lasting possession”
600	13:7	i5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And now	1	See how you translated the same expression in [1:2](../01/02.md). See the discussion of it this expression the General Introduction to Joshua, and ensure that you have been translating it consistently throughout the book. Alternate translation: “So here is what I want you to do:”
601	13:7	e9n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	to the nine tribes and half of the tribe of Manasseh	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to the nine tribes and half of the tribe of Manasseh that have not yet received any land”
602	13:8	p3m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	With him	1	The pronoun **him** refers to the other half of the tribe of Manasseh, which had already received land east of the Jordan River. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “With the other half of the tribe of Manasseh”
603	13:8	m6k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	on the other side of the Jordan, toward the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan”
604	13:9	m4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	which is on the lip of the wadi of Arnon	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:2](../12/02.md).
605	13:9	e7p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and the city that {is} in the middle of the wadi	1	This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “and the nearby city, known as one of the cities of Aroer, that is in the middle of the wadi” (2) Alternate translation: “including the part of that city that is in the middle of the wadi”
606	13:11	m8n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and the border of the Geshurite and the Maakathite	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:4](../12/04.md). Alternate translation: “and the territory of the Geshurites and the Maakathites”
607	13:15	e5p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
608	13:16	j054		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	which is on the lip of the wadi of Arnon	1	See how you translated the same expression in [12:2](../12/02.md).
609	13:21	n7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Evi and Rekem and Zur and Hur and Reba	1	The words **Evi**, **Rekem**, **Zur**, **Hur**, and **Reba** are the names of men.
610	13:22	j055		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Beor	1	The word **Beor** is the name of a man.
611	13:22	j2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	with the slain	1	The author is using the adjective **slain** as a noun to mean people who were killed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this adjective with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among the others they killed”
612	13:23	h5m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	the Jordan and the border	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **Jordan** tells what river this was the **border** or shore of. Alternate translation: “the shore of the Jordan River”
613	13:24	j056		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
614	13:25	m2n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the border	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory”
615	13:25	e5p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and half of the land of the sons of Ammon	1	The author assumes that readers will know that King Sihon and the Amorites had conquered half of the land that had formerly belonged to the Ammonites. He is referring to this land, not to a further half of the land where the Ammonites were still living. Alternate translation: “and the land that King Sihon and the Amorites had taken from the Ammonites, which amounted to half of their land”
616	13:27	h4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	the Jordan and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md). Alternate translation: “with the Jordan as a border”
617	13:29	j095		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Moses gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And Moses gave land”
618	13:30	m9p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their border	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their territory”
619	13:30	n2k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jair	1	The word **Jair** is the name of a man. [Numbers 32:41](../num/32/41.md) describes his conquest of these **towns**.
620	13:31	n5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Makir	1	The word **Makir** is the name of a man.
621	13:32	e8p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	caused to inherit	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “caused these tribes to inherit” or “caused these tribes to possess”
622	14:intro	dsn7				0	# Joshua 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It begins to describe the division of the land west of the Jordan River (14:1–5), and it relates how Joshua gave the city of Hebron and the surrounding area to Caleb (14:6–15).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
623	14:1	m4n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	inherited	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is using the term **inherited** by association to describe receiving a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “came to possess”
624	14:1	e5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and the heads of the fathers of	1	The author is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He is using the word **fathers** to mean “father’s houses.” In ancient Israel, that expression described extended families, comprising three or four generations, led by a man who was the father, grandfather, or great-grandfather of the family members. The household also included servants. You can supply this word in your translation or use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and the heads of the father’s houses of” or “and the men who led the extended families of”
625	14:2	s3p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	by the hand of Moses	1	The author is using one part of Moses, his **hand**, to mean all of him in the act of passing on a command from Yahweh to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Moses”
626	14:3	e7m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	from the other side of the Jordan	1	The author is speaking of the location of this **land** from the perspective of the west side of the Jordan River. The **other side** therefore means the east side. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan River”
627	14:4	x2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	And they gave no portion to the Levites in the land if not cities for dwelling and their pasturelands for their livestock and for their property	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “The only portion that they gave to the Levites in the land was cities for dwelling and their pasturelands for their livestock and property”
628	14:4	p5k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And they gave no portion to the Levites	1	Here, **they** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “And the Levites were given no portion”
629	14:6	n3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Jephunneh & Kenizzite	1	The word **Jephunneh** is the name of a man, and the word **Kenizzite** is the name of a people group.
630	14:6	m7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean a command that Yahweh gave by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “command”
631	14:7	i4k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I {was} a son of 40 years	1	Caleb is using a common expression of his culture to state his age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I was 40 years old”
632	14:7	m8n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And I brought back word to him just as {was} in my heart	1	Here the **heart** represents the thoughts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And I told him what I honestly felt to be the truth”
633	14:7	m2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean the report he gave by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a report”
634	14:8	m5k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	But my brothers	1	Caleb is using the term **brothers** to describe people who are descended from the same ancestor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But my fellow Israelites”
635	14:8	i9n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	went up	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, in Hebrew, writers and speakers generally indicated whether people were going up to a higher elevation or going down to a lower elevation when they traveled. If your language does not mark travel for change in elevation, you can translate such expressions more simply. Alternate translation: “went”
636	14:8	m3p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	made the heart of the people melt	1	Here the **heart** represents courage, and **melt** represents losing courage. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “made the people lose their courage”
637	14:8	i6k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	But I myself was full after Yahweh my God	1	Caleb is using a common expression to mean he obeyed God completely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But I obeyed Yahweh my God completely”
638	14:9	j040		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	saying, ‘If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever, for you were full after Yahweh my God’	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me that the land on which my foot had trodden would certainly be for an inheritance for me and my sons forever, since I had been full after Yahweh his God”
639	14:9	r4m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever, for you were full after Yahweh my God	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you obeyed Yahweh your God completely, the land on which your foot has trodden will be an inheritance for you and your descendants forever”
640	14:9	o2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula	If the land on which your foot has trodden will not be for an inheritance for you and for your sons unto forever	1	Following the custom of his culture, Moses is swearing an oath by stating the first part of a condition (**if**) but not the second part (“then”). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explicitly state the second part of this condition. Alternate translation: “If the land on which your foot has walked does not become an inheritance for you and your descendants forever, then may Yahweh punish me severely”
641	14:9	s7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	the land on which your foot has trodden	1	Moses is using one part of Caleb, his **foot**, to mean all of him in the act of walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the land where you have walked”
642	14:9	m9n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your sons	1	Moses is speaking as if all of the descendants of Caleb were actually his **sons**. Alternate translation: “your descendants”
643	14:9	i5p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	you were full after Yahweh my God	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [14:8](../14/08.md).
644	14:10	j057		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	behold & behold	1	In both instances, Caleb is using the term **behold** to focus his listener’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “listen to this … listen to this”
645	14:10	m8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	this word	1	Caleb is using the term **word** by association to mean a command that Yahweh spoke by using wordds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this command”
646	14:10	i2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	I am a son of 85 years	1	Caleb is using a common expression of his culture to state his age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am 85 years old”
647	14:11	j060		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Still I {am} strong today just as on the day Moses sent me. As {was} my strength then, so {is} my strength now	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “I have just as much strength now as I had then, on the day when Moses sent me”
648	14:11	i3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	for war, and for going out and for coming in	1	Caleb is using a common expression to refer to leadership. It is clear from verses such as [1 Kings 3:7](../1ki/03/07.md) that the expression **going out and coming in** is a general description of the work of rulers and commanders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “both to fight in war and to command soldiers in battle”
649	14:12	e6p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and great fortified cities	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and that there were great fortified cities there”
650	14:12	i8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Yahweh {will be} with me	1	Caleb is using a common expression to mean that God will help him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will help me”
651	14:14	r5n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Hebron is to Caleb, the son of Jephunneh the Kenizzite, for an inheritance unto this day, because he was full after Yahweh, the God of Israel	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because Caleb obeyed Yahweh completely, Hebron has belonged to him and his descendants as an inheritance unto this day”
652	14:14	i4m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	he was full after Yahweh	1	See how you translated the similar expressions in [14:8](../14/08.md) and [14:9](../14/09.md).
653	14:15	j041		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	(Now the name of Hebron formerly {was} Kiriath Arba. He {was} a great man among the Anakites.)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers recognize that **Hebron** is the same city that they may have known as **Kiriath Arba**. He is also providing information about the man **Arba** for whom the city was originally named. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
654	14:15	p9k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	And the land rested from war	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [11:23](../11/23.md). Alternate translation: “And there was no more war in the land”
655	15:intro	ght5				0	# Joshua 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It describes how Joshua gave land west of the Jordan River to the tribe of Judah (15:1–63).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
656	15:1	j061		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the lot	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned to the tribe of Judah by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory assigned”
657	15:1	i5k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the wilderness of Zin in the Negev from the end of the south	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author describes the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express these relative locations in the way that your culture would describe them. Alternate translation: “to the wilderness of Zin in the Negev at its extreme southern end”
658	15:2	n3p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the Sea of Salt	1	See how you translated this name in [3:16](../03/16.md) and [12:3](../12/03.md). Alternate translation: “the Dead Sea”
659	15:2	j062		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the tongue	1	The author is speaking of this sea as if it were a living thing that had a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the bay”
660	15:3	t4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	the Ascent of Akrabbim	1	**Akrabbim** is a Hebrew word that the ULT has spelled out using English letters so that readers will know how it sounds. The word means “scorpions” in Hebrew, and here it is the name of a place. In your translation you could spell this name the way it sounds in your language, or you could express its meaning as a name. Alternate translation: “Scorpion Pass”
661	15:3	i5k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	then it went up	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, in Hebrew, writers and speakers generally indicated whether people were going up to a higher elevation or going down to a lower elevation when they traveled. If your language does not mark travel for change in elevation, you can translate such expressions more simply, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “then it went”
662	15:4	j063		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	{to} the wadi of Egypt	1	This seems to be the same body of water that is mentioned in [13:13](../13/13.md), where it is called the Shihor River. You could use that same name here if that would be helpful to your readers.
663	15:4	q3m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	This will be for you the border of the south	1	The author is not addressing all of his readers directly and telling them that this will be their border. Rather, he is quoting the words that Yahweh told Moses to speak to the Israelites in [Numbers 34:3](../num/34/03.md) about what their southern border would be as a nation. The implication is that the territory of the tribe of Judah would extend to the south all the way to this national border. You may wish to indicate that this sentence is a quotation by putting it within first-level quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate a first-level quotation.
664	15:4	p8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	This will be for you the border of the south	1	Another approach to translating this sentence would be to use the past tense and the third person, as the author does in the rest of this account, to show that he is not addressing readers directly but continuing to describe the borders of the tribe of Judah. Alternate translation: “This was their southern border”
665	15:5	p2n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	from the tongue	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “from the bay”
666	15:7	t5k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	from the Valley of Achor	1	See how you translated this name in [7:24](../07/24.md).
667	15:8	m7n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the shoulder of the Jebusite from the south	1	The author is using the term **Jebusite**, which he explains means **Jerusalem**, by association to mean Mount Zion, the mountain on which the Jebusite city of Jerusalem was located. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the southern shoulder of Mount Zion”
668	15:8	p3k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the shoulder of the Jebusite from the south	1	The author is speaking of the mountain on which **Jerusalem** was built as if it were a living thing that had a **shoulder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the southern slope of Mount Zion”
669	15:8	p9m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the head of the hill	1	The author is speaking of this **hill** as if it were a living thing that had a **head**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the top of the hill”
670	15:9	b6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	to Baalah (it is Kiriath Jearim)	1	The author is providing background information to explain to readers that the city he calls **Baalah** is the same one that they know as **Kiriath Jearim**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
671	15:10	p4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the shoulder of Mount Jearim from the north	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:8](../15/18.md). Alternate translation: “to the north slope of Mount Jearim”
672	15:10	b8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Mount Jearim & (it is Kesalon)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that **Mount Jearim** was also known as **Kesalon**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
673	15:11	j064		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the shoulder of Ekron to the north	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:8](../15/18.md). Alternate translation: “the northern slope of the mound on which the city of Ekron was built”
674	15:11	e5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the goings out of the border were at the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, when the author says **the sea**, typically he means the Mediterranean Sea. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And the border ended at the Mediterranean Sea”
675	15:12	h7p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	{was} the Great Sea and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md). Alternate translation: “was the coast of the Great Sea”
676	15:12	n3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	{was} the Great Sea	1	See how you translated this name in [1:4](../01/04.md). Alternate translation: “was the Mediterranean Sea”
677	15:13	p6n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	he gave	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Joshua. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Joshua gave”
678	15:13	j058		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	according to the mouth of Yahweh to Joshua	1	The author is using the term **mouth** by association to mean the words that Yahweh spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “according to what Yahweh had commanded Joshua”
679	15:13	b8p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Kiriath Arba (the father of the Anak), it {is} Hebron	1	See how you presented the similar background information that the author provides in [14:15](../14/15.md) about the former and current name of this city.
680	15:14	m2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	the three sons of Anak, Sheshai and Ahiman and Talmai, the children of Anak	1	The author is using the term **sons** to refer to the three clans that were descended from a man named **Anak**. He is using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the three Anakite clans of Sheshai, Ahiman, and Talmai, who were all descendants of Anak”
681	15:15	b5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	(Now the name of Debir {was} formerly Kiriath Sepher.)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that **Debir** was formerly known as **Kiriath Sepher**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
682	15:17	p7n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	So he gave	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Caleb. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “So Caleb gave”
683	15:18	j042		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now it happened	1	The author is using this phrase to introduce background information that is not part of the main narrative. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
684	15:18	j043		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	in the coming of her	1	The author assumes that his readers will understand what he means by this phrase. This could mean: (1) that Aksah came to Kiriath Sepher in order to marry Othniel and that she made this **request** when she arrived and saw the land that Caleb had given to him. Alternate translation: “when Aksah arrived at Kiriath Sepher” (2) that the author is using this expression to describe Aksah entering Othniel’s household as his wife. Alternate translation: “once Aksah had married Othniel”
685	15:18	j044		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	that she persuaded him to request the field	1	The author is leaving implicit who was to make this request. The meaning does not seem to be that Aksah persuaded Othniel that he should **request** this **field** from Caleb, since he is not the one who asks; she is. In this culture, a young man such as Othniel may not have had the standing to make this kind of request from a leader such as Caleb. So the meaning seems to be that Aksah persuaded Othniel that she should ask for the field. In this culture, a daughter may have been able to make such a request of her father. Alternate translation: “that she persuaded him to allow her to request the field”
686	15:18	j045		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the field from her father	1	The author has a particular **field** in view. The narrative suggests implicitly that Caleb had given some land to Othniel but that it was arid territory. It suggests further that near this land, there was some ground that was suitable for cultivation because it was watered by springs. You could state this information explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “from her father some land that was nearby the land that he had already given to Othniel and that was watered by springs and so could be cultivated”
687	15:18	j046		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	What for you?	1	Caleb is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What would you like me to do for you?”
688	15:19	j047		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Give	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give”
689	15:19	j048		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	a blessing	1	In this context, the word **blessing** is an abstract noun. It does not refer to something that someone would say to cause good and beneficial things to happen to a person. Instead, it refers to a good and beneficial thing itself. If your language does not use abstract nouns in this way, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something that will benefit me”
690	15:19	j049		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense	you shall also give to me	1	Aksah is using a verb form that could either indicate what a person ought to do or what a person is going to do. This could mean: (1) that since the land Caleb gave Aksah and Othniel was dry, he also ought to give them some land with springs of water. Alternate translation: “you should also give me” (2) that Aksah is answering Caleb’s question and this is implicitly her request. Alternate translation: “my request is that you will also give me”
691	15:19	j050		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	springs of waters & the upper springs and the lower springs	1	Aksah and the author are using these expressions to mean by association the land on which these **springs** were located. Alternate translation: “some land that has springs of waters … some land in that area where there were upper springs and lower springs”
692	15:19	j051		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	springs of waters	1	It might seem that this expression contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “springs” or “land on which there are springs”
693	15:20	e4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	This {is} the inheritance of	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, the author is using the term **inheritance** by association to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “The following cities became the possession of”
694	15:21	m7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	at the end of the tribe of	1	The author is using the term **tribe** by association to mean the territory that belonged to this tribe. The context shows that by **end**, he means the southern end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the southern end of the territory of the tribe of”
695	15:21	n5p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Kabzeel and Eder and Jagur	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, these names and all of the other names in verses 22–62 are the names of cities unless the text indicates otherwise with expressions such as “the wadi of Egypt” or “the Great Sea” as in [15:47](../15/47.md).
696	15:25	b3k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kerioth Hezron (it is Hazor)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kerioth Hezron** is the one they know as **Hazor**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
697	15:32	e8m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	All of the cities	1	The author assumes that readers will know he means the **cities** in the southern part of Judah’s territory. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “All of the cities in the southern part of the territory of Judah”
698	15:33	e2p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	In the lowlands	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These were the cities in the lowlands of the territory of Judah”
699	15:46	j065		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	{were} on the hand of Ashdod	1	The author is using the term **hand** by association to mean near or close by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “were nearby Ashdod”
700	15:47	n4p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the wadi of Egypt	1	See how you translated this same name in [13:13](../13/13.md) and [15:4](../15/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Shihor River”
701	15:47	h7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	and the Great Sea and the border	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:23](../13/23.md) and [15:12](../15/12.md). Alternate translation: “and the coast of the Great Sea”
702	15:48	e5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And in the hill country	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And these were the cities in the hill country of the territory of Judah”
703	15:49	b8k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kiriath Sannah (it is Debir)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Sannah** is the one they know as **Debir**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
704	15:54	b2p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	and Kiriath Arba (it is Hebron)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Arba** is the one they know as **Hebron**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
705	15:60	b4k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Kiriath Baal (it is Kiriath Jearim)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Kiriath Baal** is the one they know as **Kiriath Jearim**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
706	15:61	e7m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	In the wilderness	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “These were the cities in the wilderness of the territory of Judah”
707	15:63	g3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Jebusite & the Jebusite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Jebusite**. He means the Jebusite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Jebusites … the Jebusites”
708	16:intro	bpv3				0	# Joshua 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It begins to describe how Joshua gave land west of the Jordan River to the two tribes that were descendants of Joseph (16:1–4), starting with the tribe of Ephraim (16:5–10).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
709	16:1	m4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the lot	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the territory assigned by lot”
710	16:1	m2p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	for the sons of Joseph	1	The author is speaking as if the people of the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh were actually the **sons** of Joseph. Alternate translation: “for the descendants of Joseph”
711	16:1	j066		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the waters of Jericho from the sunrise	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sunrise** by association to mean the direction where the sun rises, that is, the east. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “to the waters east of Jericho”
712	16:3	m5n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	toward the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here the author is using the term **sea** by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “westward”
713	16:2	otie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	from Bethel to Luz	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, all names in border descriptions and lists, such as are found in this chapter, are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST. So the words **Bethel** and **Luz** are the names of cities, as are similar words throughout this chapter.
714	16:3	j103		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the border of the Japhletite, unto the border of Lower Beth Horon	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean territory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the territory of the Japhletites, to the territory of Lower Beth Horon”
715	16:3	g3p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Japhletite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Japhletite**. He means the members of the Japhletite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Japhletites”
716	16:3	e6k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and its goings out were at the sea	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, when the author says **the sea**, typically he means the Mediterranean Sea. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “and the border ended at the Mediterranean Sea”
717	16:4	m9n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And the sons of Joseph, Manasseh and Ephraim	1	The author is speaking as if the people of the tribes of Ephraim and Manasseh were actually the **sons** of Joseph. Alternate translation: “And the descendants of Joseph, the tribes of Manasseh and Ephraim”
718	16:4	m3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	inherited	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is using by association the idea of inheriting to mean receiving a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “received territory as a lasting possession”
719	16:5	i7p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the sunrise was Ataroth Addar unto Upper Beth Horon	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author is describing the location of one place relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express this in the way your culture describes the relative location of places. Alternate translation: “began at Ataroth Addar and went west to Upper Beth Horon”
720	16:9	j067		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	set apart	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Israelite leaders set apart”
721	16:10	g4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Canaanite & the Canaanite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Canaanite**. He means Canaanites in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites … the Canaanites”
722	17:intro	m3nk				0	# Joshua 17 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It continues the description of how Joshua gave land west of the Jordan River to the two tribes that were descendants of Joseph. It describes the land he gave to the tribe of Manasseh (17:1–18).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
723	17:1	j068		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And a lot was	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a territory was assigned by lot”
724	17:1	j069		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Now he was the firstborn of Joseph	1	The author is reminding readers of what he has already told them in [16:4](../16/04.md), that the descendants of Joseph had become the two tribes of Ephraim and **Manasseh**. So most of the tribal allotments went to descendants of Jacob’s sons, but the allotments described in [16:5–10](../16/05.md) and in this chapter went to descendants of Jacob’s grandsons.
725	17:1	j070		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	For Makir, the firstborn of Manasseh, the father of Gilead	1	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that **Makir**, not **Manasseh**, was the **father of Gilead**. Alternate translation: “For Makir, who was the firstborn of Manasseh and who was the father of Gilead”
726	17:1	m7k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	because he was a man of war, so to him	1	The author is using the singular pronouns **he** and **him**, representing Makir, by association to mean his descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “because his descendants were great warriors, so to them”
727	17:2	p6n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And it was	1	The pronoun **it** refers to the territory assigned by lot on the west side of the Jordan River. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the territory assigned by lot on the west side of the Jordan River was”
728	17:3	e4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	no sons were to him, if not daughters	1	If it would appear in your language that the author was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the only children he had were daughters”
729	17:4	j073		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And they came near to the face of Eleazar the priest and to the face of Joshua, the son of Nun, and to the face of the leaders	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean the presence of a person or group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And they came into the presence of Eleazar the priest; Joshua, the son of Nun; and the leaders” or “And they approached Eleazar the priest; Joshua, the son of Nun; and the leaders”
730	17:4	m3k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	an inheritance	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the term **inheritance** means by association a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “a lasting possession of land”
731	17:4	m5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	our brothers	1	Since, as [17:3](../17/03.md) indicates, these women had no actual **brothers**, they are using that term to refer to their relatives. Alternate translation: “the other members of our tribe”
732	17:4	p2k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And he gave	1	The pronoun **he** refers to Joshua. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And Joshua gave”
733	17:4	m7n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	according to the mouth of Yahweh	1	The author is using the term **mouth** by association to mean the words that Yahweh spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “according to what Yahweh had commanded”
734	17:4	k3p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	the brothers of their father	1	Your language may have its own term or expression for this relationship. Alternate translation: “their uncles”
735	17:5	j074		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	So ten portions of Manasseh fell	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [13:6](../13/06.md). Alternate translation: “So the leaders assigned ten portions of land by lot to the tribe of Manasseh”
736	17:5	e8p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	So ten portions of Manasseh fell	1	The meaning in context seems to be that five of these **portions** went to the clans named in [17:2](../17/02.md) and the other five went to the daughters of Zelophehad and their descendants. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “So the leaders assigned portions of land to the five clans descended from Manasseh’s sons and to the five daughters of Zelphehad and their families”
737	17:5	i5k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	which {were} from the other side of the Jordan	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author describes the location of one place relative to another from his own perspective and in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express these relative locations in the way your culture would describe them. Alternate translation: “on the east side of the Jordan River”
738	17:6	m6p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	the daughters of Manasseh & his sons	1	The author is speaking of these people as if they were the actual **daughters** and **sons** of Manasseh. Alternate translation: “the female descendants of Manasseh who had no brothers ... his male descendants”
739	17:7	j075		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	which is on the face of Shechem	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean the area in front of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “which is next to Shechem”
740	17:8	b5p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	The land of Tappuah was to Manasseh, but Tappuah at the border of Manasseh {was} to the sons of Ephraim	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that while the territory around Tappuah belonged to Manasseh, the city of Tappuah itself belonged to Ephraim. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
741	17:9	e7k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and its goings out were seaward	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, when the author says **seaward**, typically he means the Mediterranean Sea. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and the border ended at the Mediterranean Sea”
742	17:10	e4n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Southward {was} to Ephraim, and northward {was} to Manasseh	1	The author assumes that readers will understand he is referring to the land on either side of the wadi of Kanah. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “The land south of the wadi of Kanah belonged to Ephraim, while the land north of the wadi belonged to Manasseh”
743	17:10	p8k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	its border	1	The pronoun **its** refers to the territory of Manasseh. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Manasseh’s western border”
744	17:10	j076		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And it met	1	The pronoun **it** refers to the territory of Manasseh. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And Manasseh’s territory met”
745	17:11	m5k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	and its daughters	1	The author is speaking of these towns as if they were the **daughters** of the main cities. Alternate translation: “and its surrounding towns”
746	17:11	e9p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the three of a height	1	This could mean: (1) that the last three cities mentioned, **En Dor**, **Taanach**, and **Megiddo**, were located on heights. They were all near the city of **Dor**, and they may have been considered part of the “heights of Dor” mentioned in [11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “these last three cities being in the heights of Dor” (2) that the author wants readers to recognize that the city he calls **Dor** was also known as Naphoth Dor. The word translated as **a height** could be a proper name, Naphoth. Alternate translation: “the third city on this list also being known as Naphoth Dor”
747	17:12	g4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Canaanite & they did not dispossess him	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Canaanite**. He means the Canaanite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Canaanites … they did not dispossess them”
748	17:13	r5p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	But dispossessing, they did not dispossess him	1	The author is repeating the verb **dispossess** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “But they definitely did not drive them out”
749	17:14	j080		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Why have you given to me {as} an inheritance one lot and one portion, when I am a numerous people, since Yahweh has blessed me unto now?	1	The descendants of Joseph are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have given us only one lot, one portion, as an inheritance! After all, we are a numerous people, since Yahweh has blessed us unto now.”
750	17:14	j077		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to me & when I am & has blessed me	1	The author is speaking of the tribes of Joseph as if they were a single person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly using plural pronouns, as the author himself does in verse 16. Alternate translation: “to us ... when we are ... has blessed us”
751	17:14	d7m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	one lot and one portion	1	The terms **lot** and **portion** mean similar things. The descendants of Joseph are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “only one portion of land”
752	17:15	p8n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	you are & go up for yourself & and you shall clear for yourself & to you	1	Joshua is speaking to the tribes of Joseph as if they were a single person who could receive commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly using plural pronouns. Alternate translation: “all of you are ... go up for yourselves ... you shall clear for yourselves ... to all of you”
753	17:15	e4k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and you shall clear	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and you shall clear the land”
754	17:15	g6p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Perizzite	1	The author is not referring to a specific **Perizzite**. He means the Perizzite people group in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “the Perizzites”
755	17:15	j078		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	is narrow to you	1	Joshua is using a common expression to mean there is not enough space. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is not big enough for you”
756	17:16	g5m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	and a chariot of iron {is} with every Canaanite	1	The descendants of Joseph are not referring to a specific **Canaanite** or to a specific **chariot**. They mean the members of the Canaanite people group in general and the chariots they possess. It may be more natural in your language to express these meanings using plural forms. Alternate translation: “and the Canaanites all have iron chariots”
757	17:16	m2k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and a chariot of iron	1	The metal iron was barely used during this time period, so this is not a reference to chariots entirely made of **iron**. Those would have been too heavy for any practical use in warfare anyway. It is probably a reference by association to chariots whose wheels or floor were strengthened with iron or that had iron studs or points to make them more destructive when used in ramming. Alternate translation: “chariots fitted out with iron”
758	17:17	m7p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to the house of Joseph	1	The author is speaking of the tribes descended from Joseph as if they were a **house**. He is envisioning them as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “to the tribes descended from Joseph”
759	17:17	j090		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	You {are} & {is} to you & to you	1	Joshua is speaking of the tribes of Joseph as if they were a single person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly using plural pronouns. Alternate translation: “All of you are ... is to all of you all ... to all of you”
760	17:17	j079		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	There will not be one lot to you	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the term **one**, which is negative in this context. Alternate translation: “You will receive more than one lot”
761	17:17	apm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	one lot	1	Joshua is using the term **lot** by association to a portion of territory assigned by lot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “one portion of territory”
762	17:18	g2k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	For & For	1	Joshua is using the word **For** in each instance to introduce the reason for what he has just said. Alternate translation: “You will have more than one portion because ... This is also true because”
763	17:18	s5p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	and its goings out will be to you	1	The author is using one part of the territory, its **goings out** or boundaries, to mean all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and all of that territory will belong to you”
764	18:intro	j38i				0	# Joshua 18 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It begins the description of how Joshua gave land west of the Jordan River to the remaining tribes of Israel:\n* Joshua sent men to survey and divide the remaining land (18:1–10)\n* Joshua assigned land to the tribe of Benjamin (18:11–28)\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
765	18:1	r4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	And the land was subdued to their face	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could move this clause to the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for the result that the rest of the verse describes. Alternate translation: “Since the land was subdued to their face”
766	18:1	tjtj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the land was subdued	1	The author is using the term **land** by association to mean the people groups who had been living in the land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people groups who lived in the land were subdued”
767	18:1	p3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	And the land was subdued	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they had subdued the land” or “And they had subdued the people groups who were living in the land”
768	18:1	s5k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to their face	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean what was in front of the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before them”
769	18:2	p7n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	they had not divided	1	The pronoun **they** refers to Joshua and the leaders of Israel. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Joshua and the leaders had not divided”
770	18:2	m4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	their inheritance	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the term **inheritance** means by association a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations. Alternate translation: “a lasting possession of land”
771	18:3	j081		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	to the sons of Israel	1	The context makes clear that the author is using an entire group, the **sons of Israel**, to mean one part of that group, the Israelite tribes that had not yet received any land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of those tribes”
772	18:3	j082		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Unto when will you slacken yourselves to enter to possess the land that Yahweh, the God of your fathers, has given to you?	1	Joshua is using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You must stop being so slow to enter and take possession of the land that Yahweh, the God of your fathers, has given to you!”
773	18:3	m6k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your fathers	1	Joshua is speaking as if these people were the actual **fathers** of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors”
774	18:4	i3n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and they shall arise	1	As in the similar expressions in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [6:26](../06/26.md), Joshua is using the term **arise** to mean “take action.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they will act on this matter”
775	18:4	j083		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	according to the mouth of their inheritance	1	Joshua is using the expression **the mouth** to mean “the needs,” since people need food to put in their mouths. Alternate translation: “according to what they need to inherit” or “according to the number of regions that these remaining tribes will need to live in”
776	18:5	m4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	will stand on its border & will stand on their border	1	Joshua is using the term **border** by association in both instances to mean territory enclosed within borders. The word **stand** has the sense of “remain.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “will remain in its territory ... will remain in their territory” or “will retain all of its territory ... will retain all of their territory”
777	18:5	i7k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the south & from the north	1	As the General Introduction to Joshua discusses, here and throughout this chapter, the author describes the location of one place relative another from his own perspective and in the way that is characteristic of his culture. In your translation, express these relative locations in the way that your culture would describe them. Alternate translation: “in the south ... in the north” or “in the southern part of the land of Canaan ... in the northern part of the land of Canaan”
778	18:6	j084		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the face of	1	Joshua is using the term **face** by association to mean the presence of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of”
779	18:8	j087		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And the men arose	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that these men took action. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And the men acted on these instructions”
780	18:11	e6p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the lot of the tribe of the sons of Benjamin according to their clans came up	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that he means the first **lot**, that is, the lot that assigned the first of these seven divisions of territory. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And when Joshua threw the lot, it selected the tribe of the sons of Benjamin according to their clans to receive the first division of the land the men had described”
781	18:11	m3k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the border of their lot	1	The author is using the term **lot** by association to mean the territory that was assigned by casting lots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the border of their assigned territory”
782	18:11	j088		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	between the sons of Judah and between the sons of Joseph	1	The author is using the terms **sons of Judah** and **sons of Joseph** by association to mean the territories of these tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “between the territory of Judah’s descendants and the territory of Joseph’s descendants”
783	18:12	e5k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	to the mouth of the north	1	Here the word **mouth** has the sense of “end” or “edge,” perhaps because the mouth of an animal is typically at one end of it. Alternate translation: “on the northern end of their territory” or “on the northern edge of their territory”
784	18:12	p7n2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the shoulder of Jericho from the north	1	The author is speaking of the mound on which **Jericho** was built as if it were a living thing that had a **shoulder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the northern slope of the Jericho mound”
785	18:13	p4k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	to the shoulder of Luz southward	1	The author is speaking of the hill on which **Luz** was built as if it were a living thing that had a **shoulder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the southern slope of the hill on which the city of Luz is built”
786	18:13	b6n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	it {is} Bethel	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city formerly known as **Luz** is the one they know as **Bethel**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
787	18:14	j091		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	that {is} on the face of Beth Horon southward	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean the area in front of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “that is next to Beth Horon on the south”
788	18:14	b8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	it {is} Kiriath Jearim	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city known as **Kiriath Baal** is the one they know as **Kiriath Jearim**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
789	18:14	e3n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	This {was} the mouth of the sea	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [18:12](../18/12.md). Alternate translation: “This was the western edge of the territory”
790	18:15	e7k2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the mouth southward	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [18:12](../18/12.md). Alternate translation: “And the southern boundary”
791	18:16	m4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	that {is} on the face of the Valley of Ben Hinnom	1	The author is using the term **face** by association to mean the area in front of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “that is next to the Valley of Ben Hinnom”
792	18:16	m6k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to the shoulder of the Jebusite to the south	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [15:8](../15/08.md). Alternate translation: “to the southern slope of Mount Zion”
793	18:18	p5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	And it passed over to the shoulder of the front of the Arabah northward and went down to the Arabah	1	The author is speaking of the terrain as if it were a living thing that had a **shoulder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Then it continued onto the north side of the slope facing the plains and went down into the plains”
794	18:19	j092		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the shoulder of Beth Hoglah northward	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [18:12](../18/12.md). Alternate translation: “to the northern slope of the hill on which the city of Beth Hoglah is built”
795	18:19	j093		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	the tongue of the Sea of Salt northward	1	See how you translated the same expression in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “the bay at the north end of the Dead Sea”
796	18:20	e7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the Jordan borders it to the mouth eastward	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [18:12](../18/12.md). Alternate translation: “And the Jordan River is its eastern boundary”
797	18:28	m4p6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and the Jebusite	1	The author is using the term **Jebusite** by association to mean the city in which the Jebusite people group lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and the city of the Jebusites”
798	18:28	b6k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	it {is} Jerusalem	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city of the Jebusites is the one they know as **Jerusalem**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
799	19:intro	j62l				0	# Joshua 19 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up among the various tribes the land the Israelites conquered. It concludes the description of how Joshua gave land west of the Jordan River to the remaining tribes of Israel:\n* Simeon (19:1–9)\n* Zebulun (19:10–16)\n* Issachar (19:17–23)\n* Asher (19:24–31)\n* Naphtali (19:32–39)\n* Dan (19:40–48)\nThe chapter also describes how the Israelites gave territory to Joshua (19:49–51)\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Ordinal numbers\nIn this chapter, the author uses ordinal numbers to describe the lots for each of the remaining tribes in the order in which those tribes were selected. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers or an equivalent expression.\n\n### Translation issues specific to this section\n\nSee Part 4 of the General Introduction to Joshua for a discussion of translation issues specific to the descriptions in Chapters 13–21 of territories and their borders. These issues include:\n1. The author uses the idea of “inheritance” to mean a lasting possession that would be passed down to future generations.\n2. The author marks travel for change in elevation. He says, for example, “went up” or “went down” rather than just “went.”\n3. The author describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named.\n4. The author often says simply “the sea” when he means the Mediterranean Sea, which he calls the Great Sea when he names it.\n5. The author often uses the term “sea” by association to mean the direction of the Mediterranean Sea, that is, from his perspective, the west.\n6. Similarly, the author often uses the term “sunrise” by association to mean the direction in which the sun rises, that is, the east.\n7. All names in border descriptions and lists are the names of cities and towns unless otherwise indicated in the biblical text, in a note, or in the UST.\n
800	19:1	o4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	And the second lot	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “And lot number two”
801	19:8	b5n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Baalath Beer (Ramah of the Negev)	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city known as **Baalath Beer** is the one they know as **Ramah of the Negev**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
802	19:13	j096		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	being turned	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “turning”
803	19:14	j094		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	it	1	The pronoun **it** refers to Neah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Neah”
804	19:15	j097		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Kattath and Nahalal and Shimron and Idalah and Bethlehem	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And their territory included Kattath and Nahalal and Shimron and Idalah and Bethlehem”
805	19:15	e8p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	12 cities and their villages	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that he is not listing all 12 of the cities that belonged to Zebulun but that the ones he does list were among them. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “these were among their 12 cities with their villages”
806	19:18	j098		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And their border {was} Jezreel and Chesulloth and Shunem	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory enclosed within borders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And their territory included the following cities: Jezreel and Chesulloth and Shunem”
807	19:25	m6n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And their border {was} Helkath and Hali and Beten and Akshaph	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory enclosed within borders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And their territory included the following cities: Helkath and Hali and Beten and Akshaph”
808	19:26	j099		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And it met with Carmel	1	The pronoun **it** refers to the border or territory of Asher. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And their border began at Mount Carmel”
809	19:27	j100		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	from the left	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that he is speaking from the perspective of a person facing east, which was the customary orientation in this culture. So **left** means “north.” You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the north”
810	19:29	a4k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the city of fortification of Tyre	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fortification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the fortified city of Tyre”
811	19:30	e8p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	22 cities and their villages	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that he is not listing all 22 of the cities that belonged to Asher but that the ones he does list were among them. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “these were among their 22 cities with their villages”
812	19:35	a5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	And the cities of fortification	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fortification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And the fortified cities”
813	19:41	j101		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the border of their inheritance was	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory enclosed within borders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the territory that the leaders gave to them included”
814	19:47	p4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	But the border of the sons of Dan went out from them	1	The author is speaking of the **border**, here representing the territory, as if it were a living thing that could move by itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But enemies reconquered some of the territory of the tribe of Dan”
815	19:47	j107		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	and they struck it to the mouth of the sword	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [6:21](../06/21.md). See the discussion of this expression in the General Introduction to Joshua, and be sure that you have been translating it consistently throughout the book. Alternate translation: “and they attacked it and killed everyone who lived there”
816	19:47	j108		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	their father Dan	1	The author is speaking as if **Dan** were the actual **father(( of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their ancestor Dan”
817	19:50	m8k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Upon the mouth of Yahweh	1	The author is using the term **mouth** by association to mean the words that Yahweh spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “As Yahweh had commanded”
818	19:50	j104		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And he built the city	1	Since the city of **Timnath Serah** already existed, the author seems to mean implicitly that Joshua rebuilt the city after the Israelites had attacked and conquered it or that Joshua fortified and expanded it. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And Joshua rebuilt the city” or “And Joshua fortified and expanded the city”
819	19:50	w599		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	And he built the city	1	The author is using Joshua to represent everyone who worked to rebuild or fortify **Timnath Serah**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And Joshua had the city rebuilt” or “And Joshua directed the fortification and expansion of the city”
820	19:51	j105		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	and the heads of the fathers of	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:1](../14/01.md). Alternate translation: “and the heads of the father’s houses of” or “and the men who led the extended families of”
821	20:intro	vg5f				0	# Joshua 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the description of how Joshua divided up the land the Israelites conquered. It describes how Joshua designated certain cities to be cities of refuge (20:1–9).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Cities of refuge\nIf a person was murdered, in this culture it was the duty of his relatives to provide justice by killing the murderer. However, if someone was killed by accident, it would be unfair to kill the person who had killed him accidentally. Therefore, God told the Israelites to designate “cities of refuge” to which a person who killed someone accidentally could flee. In those cities, these cases would be resolved legally. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/refuge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/avenge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Quotes in quotes\nIn verses 2–6, there is a long quotation within a quotation. Yahweh tells Joshua something that he is to tell the people of Israel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Notes suggest how to do that in the cases of verses 2 and 3. The rest of the second-level quotation can be made a first-level quotation without any changes in the wording.\n\n### Relative locations\nIn listing the cities of refuge, the author often describes the location of one place relative another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Specifically, he says from what direction someone would be approaching a new location from a location he has already named. Translate these descriptions the way you have done in the previous part of this section of the book of Joshua.\n
822	20:2	q4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Speak to the sons of Israel, saying, ‘Give for yourselves the cities of refuge that I spoke to you by the hand of Moses	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Speak to the sons of Israel and tell them to give for themselves the cities of refuge that I spoke to them about by the hand of Moses”
823	20:2	s5n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	by the hand of Moses	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:2](../14/02.md). Alternate translation: “through Moses”
824	20:3	q6k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	for you	1	If you have decided to translate the quotation within a quotation in verses 2–6 as an indirect quotation, it will be appropriate to use the third person here. Alternate translation: “for them”
825	20:3	u4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	from the avenger of blood	1	In this culture, an **avenger of blood** was a close relative who had the right and responsibility to execute someone who had murdered one of his relatives. If your readers would not be familiar with this role, in your translation you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “from a relative who has the right to execute someone who has murdered his relative”
826	20:4	p7k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And he shall flee	1	The pronoun **he** refers to anyone who has killed someone accidentally. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the person who has killed someone accidentally shall flee”
827	20:4	m3n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and he shall speak his words in the ears of the elders of that city	1	Yahweh is using the term **words** to mean what this person would say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** by association to mean hearing and understanding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and he shall explain his situation to the elders of that city so that they understand it”
828	20:5	j109		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from yesterday {or} the third day	1	See how you translated the same expression in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “in the past”
829	20:6	a4n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	for judgment	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to judge his case” or “to decide whether he is actually guilty of murder”
830	20:6	e6k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	until the death of the great priest	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and even if he is found innocent, he must still remain there until the death of the high priest”
831	20:6	j089		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	who is in those days	1	Yahweh is using the expression **in those days** by association to mean serving as high priest at that time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “who is serving at that time”
832	20:7	b5k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	it is Hebron	1	The author is providing background information to help readers understand that the city he calls **Kiriath Arba** is the one they know as **Hebron**. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture.
833	20:9	a7n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	the cities of appointment	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appointment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the cities that were appointed”
834	21:intro	pp5c				0	# Joshua 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter concludes the description of how Joshua divided up the land the Israelites conquered. It describes how Joshua designated certain cities for the Levites to live in, since they had no tribal territory of their own (21:1–45).\n\n### Ellipsis\nIn many places in this chapter, the author leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Notes suggest approaches to this issue in several specific instances. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])\n
835	21:1	j106		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And the heads of the fathers of & the heads of the fathers of	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:1](../14/01.md). Alternate translation: “And the heads of the father’s houses of ... the heads of the father’s houses of” or “And the men who led the extended families of ... the men who led the extended families of”
836	21:2	s4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	by the hand of Moses	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:2](../14/02.md). Alternate translation: “through Moses”
837	21:3	j102		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	upon the mouth of Yahweh	1	See how you translated the same expression in [19:50](../19/50.md). Alternate translation: “as Yahweh had commanded”
838	21:4	e7p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And the lot came out for the clans of the Kohathite. And for the sons of Aaron the priest, from the Levites, there were 13 cities by the lot	1	The author assumes that readers will understand that the leaders decided to assign cities to the groups of Levites in a particular order (Kohathite priests, Kohathite non-priests, Gershonites, and Merarites) and then cast lots to see which cities would go to each group. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “The leaders started by casting lots to decide which cities would belong to the Levites from the Kohathite clan who were priests, descendants of Aaron. The lot selected 13 cities for them”
839	21:5	e3k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	And for the remaining sons of Kohath	1	The author assumes that readers will understand what he means by **remaining**. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And for the descendants of Kohath who were not priests, descendants of Aaron”
840	21:8	s5n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	by the hand of Moses	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:2](../14/02.md). Alternate translation: “through Moses”
841	21:9	p4k6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	which one calls them by name	1	Here, **one** is an indefinite pronoun that does not have a specific referent in the immediate context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this with a different expression that does not use an indefinite pronoun. Alternate translation: “which are mentioned here by name”
842	21:10	o7n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	the first lot	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “lot number one”
843	21:11	b6k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Kiriath Arba (the father of the Anak, it is Hebron)	1	See how you presented the similar background information that the author provides in [14:15](../14/15.md) about the former and current name of this city.
844	21:17	j071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And from the tribe of Benjamin	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And from the tribe of Benjamin they gave these cities:”
845	21:20	j110		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the remaining ones from the sons of Kohath	1	The author assumes that readers will understand what he means by **remaining**. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Kohath who were not priests”
846	21:21	e6k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And Gezer and its pasturelands	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “And they gave them Gezer and its pasturelands”
847	21:26	j111		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the remaining clans of the sons of Kohath	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [21:5](../21/05.md). Alternate translation: “the clans of Kohath’s descendants who were not priests”
848	21:34	j112		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the remaining Levites	1	In this case, the term **remaining** means something different than it did in verses 5 and 26. The author is using it to refer implicitly to the last group of Levites, which had not yet received any cities. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the group of Levites that was still waiting to receive cities”
849	21:40	e3n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the remaining ones from the clans of the Levites	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [21:34](../21/34.md). Alternate translation: “the clan of Levites that was still waiting to receive cities”
850	21:42	i4k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	These cities were city, city, and its pasturelands around it	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that this was true of each city individually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Each one of these cities had its own pasturelands around it”
851	21:43	m6p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to their fathers	1	The author is speaking as if these people were the actual **fathers** of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their ancestors”
852	21:44	j085		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to their fathers	1	The author is speaking as if these people were the actual **fathers** of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to their ancestors”
853	21:44	j113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And a man did not stand against their faces from all of their enemies	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:11](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Not a single one of their enemies had been able to resist them”
854	21:45	j114		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	A word did not fall from every good word that Yahweh had spoken	1	The author is speaking as if Yahweh’s words were objects that could **fall** to the ground and be lost. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Not a single one of the good words Yahweh had spoken failed to come true”
855	21:45	j115		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	The whole came	1	The author is speaking of **the whole** (that is, everything that Yahweh had promised) as if it were a living thing that could **come** somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Everything happened just as he said it would”
856	22:intro	l4hr				0	# Joshua 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how Joshua dismissed the armies of the tribes that had settled on the east side of the Jordan River. It also describes how they built an altar to remind their descendants to worship Yahweh and how they resolved a misunderstanding about this altar with the other Israelites (22:1–34).\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### Quotations within quotations\nIn verses 16–20 and 22–29, there are long quotations that include quotations within quotations and, in verses 24–25, 27, and 28, quotations within quotations within quotations. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate these so that there are not a quotations within quotations. Notes suggest ways to do this.\n\n### “the sons of Israel”\nWhile this phrase typically refers to all of the Israelites, in this chapter it means specifically the people of the tribes that settled on the west side of the Jordan River. Be sure that this meaning is clear in your translation.\n\n### “brothers”\nIn this chapter, Joshua and the author use the term “brothers” to mean people who are descended from the same ancestor. In your translation, you may wish to communicate this meaning by using an expression such as “fellow Israelites.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “tents”\nJoshua uses the name of one kind of dwelling, “tents,” to mean all kinds of dwellings. In your translation, you may wish to communicate this meaning by using a word such as “homes.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n\n### “tomorrow”\nIn this chapter, characters use the word “tomorrow” several times to mean “in the future.” You may wish to use that phrase in your translation to communicate the meaning.\n
857	22:1	ge15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	to the Reubenite and to the Gadite	1	The author is not referring to specific individuals. He means the members of these tribes in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “to the Reubenites and to the Gadites”
858	22:2	me16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And you have listened to my voice	1	Joshua is using the term **voice** by association to mean the commands he gave by using his voice. He is using the word **listened** by association to mean complying with what he said. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use equivalent expressions or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And you have obeyed my commands”
859	22:3	mt17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your brothers	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Joshua is using the term **brothers** to describe people who are descended from the same ancestor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your fellow Israelites”
860	22:3	me18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	these many days	1	The author is using the term **days** by association to refer to time, since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all this time”
861	22:3	po19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	but you have kept the keeping of the commandments of Yahweh	1	For emphasis, the author is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “but you have carefullly kept the commandments of Yahweh”
862	22:4	sy20		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	to your tents	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Joshua is using one kind of home, **tents**, to mean all kinds of homes. (Not all Israelites lived in tents.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to your homes”
863	22:5	do21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	the commandment and the instruction	1	The terms **commandment** and **instruction** mean similar things. Joshua is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “everything that Yahweh has commanded”
864	22:5	mt22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	and to walk in all of his ways	1	Joshua is speaking as if following Yahweh’s commands were like walking on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and to live as he has commanded”
865	22:5	mt23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	and to cling to him	1	Joshua is speaking as if the Israelites could physically hold onto Yahweh. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and to remain completely loyal to him”
866	22:5	mt24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	with all of your heart	1	Joshua is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean thoughts and feelings. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with all of your thoughts and feelings”
867	22:5	ex25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	and with all of your soul	1	Joshua is using the word **soul** to refer implicitly to a person’s deepest commitments. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and in everything you commit yourself to do”
868	22:7	el26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Moses had given & Joshua gave	1	The author is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Moses had given land ... Joshua gave land”
869	22:9	sy27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	the sons of Israel	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, the author is using a phrase that describes all of the Israelites, **the sons of Israel**, to mean part of them, the ones who settled on the west side of the Jordan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly, here and in the rest of the chapter. Alternate translation: “the other Israelites” or “the western Israelites”
870	22:9	me28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	upon the mouth of Yahweh	1	See how you translated the same expression in [19:50](../19/50.md). Alternate translation: “as Yahweh had commanded”
871	22:9	me29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	by the hand of Moses	1	See how you translated the same expression in [14:2](../14/02.md). Alternate translation: “through Moses”
872	22:10	na30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	the regions of the Jordan that are in the land of Canaan	1	This could be a proper name. Alternate translation: “Geliloth near the Jordan, which is in the land of Canaan”
873	22:13	ex31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the priest	1	The author assumes that readers will know that he is describing Phinehas as the high priest. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the high priest”
874	22:14	pa32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	one leader, one leader, to the house of the father to all of the tribes of Israel. And they {were} a man, the head of the house of their fathers to the thousands of Israel	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “one leader from each of the tribes of Israel, each one being the head of a clan”
875	22:14	id33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	one leader, one leader, to the house of the father to all of the tribes of Israel	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that there was one leader from each tribe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was one leader of a father’s house from each of the Israelite tribes”
876	22:14	wp34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	a man	1	The author is using the phrase **a man** to introduce each leader as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation.
877	22:14	ex35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	to the thousands of Israel	1	The author is using the word **thousands** in one of its implicit senses to mean clans. You could express this meaning in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “from one of the clans of Israel”
878	22:16	qq36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Thus says all of the congregation of Yahweh: ‘What is this unfaithfulness that you have done	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter of the long quotation within a quotation in verses 16–20. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It should be sufficient just to change this introduction in order to make all of these verses a first-level direct quotation. Alternate translation: “All of the congregation of Yahweh wants to know what this unfaithfulness is that you have done”
879	22:16	rq37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	What is this unfaithfulness that you have done unfaithfully against the God of Israel, to turn today from after Yahweh in your building for yourselves an altar today for your rebelling against Yahweh?	1	The representatives of the western tribes are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have unfaithfully done unfaithfulness against the God of Israel by turning away from Yahweh and building an altar for yourselves in rebellion against him!”
880	22:16	po38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	What is this unfaithfulness that you have done unfaithfully	1	For emphasis, the western representatives are using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “What is this great unfaithfulness that you have done”
881	22:16	mt39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to turn today from after Yahweh	1	The western representatives are speaking as if following Yahweh were like walking behind him on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to stop being loyal to Yahweh”
882	22:17	rq40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	{Was} the iniquity of Peor little for us, from which we have not purified ourselves unto this day?	1	The western representatives are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The sin we committed at Peor was very serious, and we have not purified ourselves from it unto this day!”
883	22:17	ir41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	{Was} the iniquity of Peor little for us	1	The western representatives are not suggesting seriously that the eastern tribes might consider the sin the Israelites committed at **Peor** to have been too little. They actually mean to communicate emphatically the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. Alternate translation: “Certainly you consider the sin we committed at Peor to have been very serious”
884	22:18	rq42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	And will you yourselves turn today from after Yahweh?	1	The western representatives are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You must not turn away from following Yahweh!”
885	22:18	mt43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	turn today from after Yahweh	1	The western representatives are speaking as if following Yahweh were like walking behind him on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “stop being loyal to Yahweh”
886	22:18	id44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	today, then tomorrow	1	The western representatives are using characteristic expressions of their culture. By **today*, they mean “now,” and by **tomorrow**, they mean “in the future.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “now, then in the future”
887	22:19	ex45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	if the land of your possession {is} unclean	1	Interpreters have different understandings of why the representatives of the western tribes suggest that the eastern tribes may think their land is **unclean**. The UST expresses one likely interpretation.
888	22:19	ei46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	where the dwelling of Yahweh dwells there	1	It might seem that this expression contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “where Yahweh’s dwelling is”
889	22:19	po47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	where the dwelling of Yahweh dwells	1	For emphasis, the western representatives are using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “where Yahweh truly dwells”
890	22:20	rq48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	{Did} not Achan, the son of Zerah, act unfaithfully in unfaithfulness with the devoted thing, and wrath was on all of the assembly of Israel?	1	The western representatives are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “When Achan, the son of Zerah, acted unfaithfully in unfaithfulness with the devoted thing, wrath was on all of the assembly of Israel!”
891	22:20	po49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	act unfaithfully in unfaithfulness	1	For emphasis, the western representatives are using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “acted so unfaithfully”
892	22:20	li50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	And he did not perish, one man, in his iniquity	1	The western representatives are expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word, **note**, together with a term that is the opposite of their intended meaning, **one**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Many other people died because of his iniquity”
893	22:21	he51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	answered and spoke with	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **spoke** tells in what way they **answered**. Alternate translation: “responded to”
894	22:22	rd52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	Yahweh {is} God of gods! Yahweh {is} God of gods!	1	The representatives of the eastern tribes are repeating this statement in order to intensify its meaning. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is most certainly the God of gods!”
895	22:22	ex53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	Yahweh {is} God of gods!	1	The eastern representatives are using a phrase that expresses a strong feeling, conviction. There may be an equivalent exclamation in your language that you can use in your translation to convey this strong feeling. If not, you could say what the representatives were feeling. Alternate translation: “We are absolutely convinced that Yahweh is the supreme God!”
896	22:22	el54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	If in rebellion or if in unfaithfulness against Yahweh	1	The eastern representatives are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “If we have done this in rebellion or in unfaithfulness against Yahweh”
897	22:22	dn55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	do not save us	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **save**, which would be negative under the condition stated. Alternate translation: “punish us with death”
898	22:23	mt56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	to turn from after Yahweh	1	The eastern representatives are speaking as if following Yahweh were like walking behind him on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to stop being loyal to Yahweh”
899	22:23	id57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Yahweh himself will seek	1	The eastern representatives are using a common expression to mean that Yahweh will investigate and punish wrongdoing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may Yahweh investigate what we have done and punish us for it”
900	22:24	ex58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	But if not from anxiety from a matter we did this	1	The eastern representatives mean that they did not build the altar for any reason **if** it was **not** for the one that they state. If it would appear in your language that they were making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “No, the only reason we did this was from anxiety from a matter”
901	22:24	qq59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	saying, ‘Tomorrow your sons might speak to our sons, saying, “What to you and to Yahweh, the God of Israel?	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and another quotation within that one. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter of the long quotation in verses 24–28 that includes second-level and third-level quotations. Alternate translation: “thinking that tomorrow your sons might speak to our sons and ask them what to them and to Yahweh, the God of Israel”
902	22:24	mt60		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your sons & to our sons	1	The eastern representatives are speaking of future generations as if they were the actual **sons** of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your descendants ... our descendants”
903	22:24	id61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	What to you and to Yahweh, the God of Israel?	1	The eastern representatives are using a common expression of their culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What relationship do you have with Yahweh, the God of Israel?”
904	22:24	ww7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	What to you and to Yahweh, the God of Israel?	1	The eastern representatives are using the question form for emphasis. If a speaker of your language would not use the question form for that purpose, you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have no relationship with Yahweh, the God of Israel!”
905	22:25	qq62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	For Yahweh has given a border between us and between you sons of Reuben and sons of Gad, the Jordan. No portion {is} for you in Yahweh	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “We were concerned that your descendants would say that Yahweh had put a border between them and our descendants from the tribes of Reuben and Gad, the Jordan, so that they had no portion in Yahweh”
906	22:25	mt63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	No portion {is} for you in Yahweh	1	The eastern representatives are speaking as if Yahweh were a territory of which a person or group could have a **portion**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have no relationship with Yahweh”
907	22:26	qq64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	So we said, ‘Let us now do to build for ourselves an altar	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So we said to ourselves that we should now do to build for ourselves an altar”
908	22:26	ei65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	Let us now do to build	1	It might seem that this expression contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “Let us build”
909	22:26	ge66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	not for a burnt offering and not for a sacrifice	1	The eastern representatives are not referring to specific offerings or sacrifices. They mean those things in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “not for burnt offerings or sacrifices”
910	22:27	qq67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	but it {will be} a witness between us and between you	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “but as a witness between us and the western tribes”
911	22:27	ex68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	our generations	1	The eastern representatives are using the pronoun **our** to refer to their **generations** and those of their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that pronoun if your language marks that distinction.
912	22:27	po69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	to serve the service of Yahweh	1	For emphasis, the eastern representatives are using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “to serve Yahweh diligently”
913	22:27	me70		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	to his face	1	The representatives of the eastern tribes are using the term **face** by association to mean the presence of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” or “at the tent of meeting”
914	22:27	qq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	And your sons will not say to our sons tomorrow, “No portion {is} for you in Yahweh.”‘	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “That way their descendants would not tell our descendants in the future that they had no portion in Yahweh”
915	22:28	qq72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	And we said, ‘And it will happen, if they speak to us, or to our generations tomorrow, that we will say, “See, a copy of the altar of Yahweh that our fathers made, not for a burnt offering and not for a sacrifice, but it {is} a witness between us and between you.”‘	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And we decided that if they spoke to us or to our descendants in the future, we would show them that this was a copy of Yahweh’s altar, not for offerings or sacrifices, but as a witness between us and them”
916	22:28	mt73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	our fathers	1	The eastern representatives are speaking as if these people were the actual **fathers** of the current generation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”
917	22:28	ge74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	not for a burnt offering and not for a sacrifice	1	The eastern representatives are not referring to specific offerings or sacrifices. They mean these things in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “not for burnt offerings or sacrifices”
918	22:29	id75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Profane to us from him, to rebel	1	The eastern representatives are using a common expression to express their horror at the idea they describe. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “God forbid that we should rebel”
919	22:29	mt76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	and turn today from after Yahweh	1	The eastern representatives are speaking as if following Yahweh were like walking behind him on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and stop being loyal today to Yahweh”
920	22:29	ge77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	for a burnt offering, for a grain offering, or for a sacrifice	1	The eastern representatives are not referring to specific offerings or sacrifices. They mean these things in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. Alternate translation: “for burnt offerings, grain offerings, or sacrifices”
921	22:30	do78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	and the leaders of the assembly and the heads of the thousands of Israel	1	The terms mean similar things. The author is using them together for emphasis and clarity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “and the Israelite clan leaders whom the assembly had chosen”
922	22:30	me79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the words that the sons of Reuben and the sons of Gad and the sons of Manasseh spoke	1	The author is using the term **words** by association to mean what the eastern representatives said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the explanation that the people of Reuben, Gad, and Manasseh had given”
923	22:30	me80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And it was good in their eyes	1	The author is using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents perspective and judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And they judged this to be a good reason for building the altar”
924	22:31	re81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Today we know that Yahweh {is} in the midst of us, that you have not acted unfaithfully in this unfaithfulness against Yahweh	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you have not acted unfaithfully in this unfaithfulness against Yahweh, we know that Yahweh is in the midst of us”
925	22:31	ex82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Yahweh {is} in the midst of us	1	Phinehas means implicitly that Yahweh has come into **the midst of** his people in order to help them. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must be here helping us”
926	22:31	po83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry	you have not acted unfaithfully in this unfaithfulness against Yahweh	1	For emphasis, Phinehas is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have another way of showing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “you have not been unfaithful to Yahweh at all”
927	22:32	sy84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	from with the sons of Reuben and from with the sons of Gad	1	The author is using some of the eastern tribes, **Reuben** and **Gad**, to represent all of them, including Manasseh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly, here and in the next two verses. Alternate translation: “from with the sons of Reuben and from with the sons of Gad and from with the sons of Manasseh”
928	22:32	me85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	a word	1	The author is using the term **word** by association to mean a report that the leaders used words to convey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a report”
929	22:33	me86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	And the word was good in the eyes of the sons of Israel	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [22:30](../22/30.md). Alternate translation: “And the Israelites judged this to be a good explanation”
930	22:34	na87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	had called to the altar, “For it {is} a witness between us that Yahweh {is} God.”	1	Some versions of the Bible translate this as a name. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to translate this as a name if it does. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. Alternate translation: “had named the altar A Witness Between Us That Yahweh Is God”
931	23:intro	v3r6				0	# Joshua 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how Joshua brought the Israelites together, probably to his home in Timnath Serah, to give them a final exhortation before he died. (23:1–16).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### Joshua’s instructions\nIt was common in the Ancient Near East for an important leader to give his people instructions in anticipation of his death. If leaders in your culture also do this, translate this in a way that will help your readers recognize the practice that Joshua is following.\n
932	23:1	m15a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	from many days afterward	1	The author is using the term **days** by association to mean time, since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a long time after that”
933	23:1	i27b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	he had come into days	1	To translate this expression here and in the next verse, see how you translated the similar expression in [13:1](../13/01.md). Alternate translation: “he was very old”
934	23:3	y38c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	you yourselves have seen & your God & from your faces & for you	1	The words **you**, **yourselves**, and **your** are plural throughout this chapter because Joshua is addressing the assembled Israelites and their leaders. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction.
935	23:4	p49d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	I have caused to fall	1	Joshua is using the past tense to describe something that is going to happen in the future. He is doing that in order to show that the event will certainly happen. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will cause to fall”
936	23:4	m56e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	I have caused to fall	1	Joshua is speaking as if territories were objects that could **fall**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will defeat”
937	23:4	jsm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	as an inheritance for your tribes	1	Joshua is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and give their land to you as an inheritance for your tribes”
938	23:4	i67f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	from the Jordan, and all of the nations that I cut off, and the Great Sea from the going of the sun	1	Joshua is saying that this territory extends from the Jordan to the Great Sea. He is also saying, as supplemental information, that it includes the land of nations already conquered. It may be more natural in your language to present the supplemental information after the information about the extent of the territory. Alternate translation: “from the Jordan to the Great Sea from the going of the sun, including all of the nations that I have cut off”
939	23:6	p78g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	everything written in the book of the instruction of Moses	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that Moses wrote in the book of instruction”
940	23:6	m91i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	not to turn aside from it right or left	1	Joshua is speaking of two directions in order to mean them and everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “not to turn aside from it in any direction”
941	23:6	m89h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	not to turn aside from it right or left	1	Joshua is speaking as if following God”s law were like walking on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not to disobey it in any way”
942	23:8	m23j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	If not to Yahweh your God you shall cling	1	Joshua is speaking as if the Israelites could physically **cling** to Yahweh. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If not to Yahweh your God you shall be loyal”
943	23:8	e45k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	If not to Yahweh your God you shall cling	1	Joshua is saying that the Israelites should not be devoted to any God **if** they are **not** devoted to Yahweh. If it would appear in your language that he was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You shall cling only to Yahweh your God” or “You shall be loyal only to Yahweh your God”
944	23:9	d67l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	great and powerful nations	1	The terms **great** and **powerful** mean similar things. Joshua is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “very powerful nations”
945	23:9	i89m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	a man has not stood against your faces	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “not a single one of your enemies has been able to resist you”
946	23:10	h12n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	One man from you pursues a thousand	1	Joshua is making an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “Each one of you is able to defeat many enemies”
947	23:11	i34o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And you shall keep yourselves exceedingly to yourselves, to love Yahweh your God	1	Joshua is using a common expression to mean being very careful about something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And you shall be very careful to love Yahweh your God”
948	23:12	r56p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	if turning, you turn	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **turn** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “if you definitely turn”
949	23:12	m78q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	and cling to the remnant of these nations	1	Joshua is speaking as if the Israelites could physically **cling** to these nations. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and become loyal to the remnant of these nations”
950	23:13	r89r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	knowing, may you know	1	Joshua is repeating the verb **know** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “you may know for certain”
951	23:13	m91s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And they will be to you for a trap and for a snare and for a whip on your sides and for thorns in your eyes	1	Joshua is speaking as if these nations would actually become a **trap**, **snare**, **whip**, and **thorns**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express these as comparisons. The UST models one way to do that. You could also state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And they will harm you in many different ways”
952	23:14	m23t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	And behold	1	Joshua is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you could use in your translation.
953	23:14	e45u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	I myself am going by the way of all of the earth	1	Joshua is speaking in a polite way about his approaching death. Your language may have a similar polite expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will soon pass away”
954	23:14	m67v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	with all of your heart and with all of your soul	1	See how you translated the terms **heart** and **soul** in [22:5](../22/05.md). Alternate translation: “in your deepest feelings and intentions”
955	23:14	m89w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	not one word has fallen from all of the good words that Yahweh your God spoke concerning you & Not one word has fallen from it	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [21:45](../21/45.md). Alternate translation: “not a single one of the good words Yahweh spoke concerning you has failed to come true … No, not a single one has failed to come true”
956	23:14	m12x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	the good words that Yahweh your God spoke	1	Joshua is using the term **words** by association to mean the promises that Yahweh made using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good promises that Yahweh your God made”
957	23:14	p34y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	The whole has come to you	1	Joshua is speaking of **the whole** of what Yahweh said as if it were a living thing that could **come** to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Everything has happened just as he said”
958	23:14	m56z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	Not one word has fallen from it	1	The pronoun **it** refers to **the good words** that Joshua described earlier in the verse. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “Not one word has fallen from them”
959	23:15	p78a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	all of the good word that Yahweh your God spoke to you has come upon you	1	Joshua is speaking of **the good word** Yahweh spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything good that Yahweh your God promised has happened to you”
960	23:15	m91b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	all of the evil word	1	Joshua is using the term **word** by association to mean the warnings that Yahweh gave using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the punishments that he warned about”
961	23:16	e23c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	In your transgressing the covenant of Yahweh your God that he commanded you and you go and serve other gods and bow down to them	1	Joshua is describing one event before describing another event that would precede it. In your translation, you may wish to relate these events in the order in which they would happen. Alternate translation: “If you go and serve other gods and bow down to them and thereby transgress the covenant of Yahweh your God that he commanded you”
962	23:16	m45d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	then the nose of Yahweh will burn against you	1	Joshua is speaking as if Yahweh’s **nose** could **burn** with anger. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “then Yahweh will become very angry with you”
963	24:intro	yqa8				0	# Joshua 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter describes how Joshua had the Israelites gather in the city of Shechem to renew their covenant with Yahweh (24:1–28). It then describes how Joshua died and was buried and how the Israelites also buried the remains of other leaders who had died (24:29–33).\n\n## Religious and Cultural Concepts in This Chapter\n\n### “Cut a covenant”\nThe phrase “cut a covenant” occurs in this chapter, as it did several times in Chapter 9. It means “make a covenant.” The word “cut” is used because in some covenant ceremonies, the participants would cut up animals and then walk between the pieces. This was to indicate, “If I break this covenant, may I be destroyed in this same way.” It is not necessary to understand this background to covenant ceremonies in order to understand the action in this chapter, so you do not have to use the term “cut” in your translation. You could simply say “make,” or you could use an expression from your own language and culture.\n\n## Translation Issues in This Chapter\n\n### “you,” “your”\nYahweh, speaking through Joshua, often addresses the current generation of Israelites with the pronouns “you” and “your,” as if he had done the things he describes directly for them. Yahweh is actually using those pronouns to refer to the ancestors of the Israelites, whom he actually brought out of Egypt, by association with the current generation. In your translation, you could express this meaning by using expressions such as “your ancestors.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### “fathers”\nOften in this chapter, Yahweh speaks of the ancestors of the Israelites he is addressing as if they were their actual “fathers.” In your translation, you could express this meaning by using a term such as “ancestors.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “the Amorite,” “the foreigner,” etc.\nOften in this chapter, Yahweh and Joshua use expressions such as “the Amorite.” They not referring to a specific Amorite. They mean the Amorite people in general. The meaning is also general in similar instances, including “the foreigner” in verses 20 and 23. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using plural forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n
964	24:2	q1aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Thus says Yahweh, the God of Israel: ‘Your fathers dwelled	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter of how you can do this through the end of this second-level quotation in verse 13. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God of Israel, is telling you that your fathers dwelled”
965	24:2	m2bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	your fathers	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Yahweh is speaking of the ancestors of the Israelites as if they were their actual **fathers**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly, here and throughout this chapter. Alternate translation: “your ancestors”
966	24:2	e3cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	the river	1	Yahweh assumes that the Israelites will know that by **the river**, he means the Euphrates River. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the Euphrates River”
967	24:2	l4dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Terah, the father of Abraham and the father of Nahor	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Your ancestor was Terah, who was the father of Abraham and the father of Nahor”
968	24:3	m5ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	his seed	1	Yahweh is speaking of Abraham’s descendants as if they were his **seed**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his descendants”
969	24:5	l6ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	And I sent Moses and Aaron	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “When the Egyptians enslaved them, I sent Moses and Aaron to rescue them”
970	24:5	m7gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	I brought you out	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Yahweh is using the pronoun **you** to refer to the ancestors of the Israelites, whom he actually brought out of Egypt, by association with the current generation, whom he is addressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly, here and in subsequent instances of this usage. Alternate translation: “I brought your ancestors out”
971	24:6	g8hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	with chariot	1	Yahweh is not referring to a specific **chariot**. He means the many chariots that the Egyptians had. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form. Alternate translation: “with chariots”
972	24:7	p9ii		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	And they cried out	1	The pronoun **they** refers to the ancestors of the Israelites whom Yahweh brought out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “And your ancestors cried out”
973	24:7	p1jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	and he brought the sea over him and covered him	1	The pronoun **him** refers in each instance to **the Egyptians**. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “and he brought the sea over them and covered them”
974	24:7	s2kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	And your eyes saw	1	Yahweh is using one part of the Israelites, their **eyes**, to mean all of them in the act of seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And you saw”
975	24:7	m3lp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	many days	1	Yahweh is using the term **days** by association to mean time, since time is made up of days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for a long time”
976	24:8	g4mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	the Amorite	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Yahweh is not referring to a specific Amorite. He means the Amorite people in general. It may be more natural in your language to express this meaning by using a plural form, here and in subsequent instances of this usage. Alternate translation: “the Amorites”
977	24:9	i5nr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	And Balak, the son of Zippor, the king of Moab, arose	1	See how you translated the similar expression in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “And Balak, the son of Zippor, the king of Moab, took action”
978	24:9	n6ps		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Beor	1	The word **Beor** is the name of a man.
979	24:10	r7qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-reduplication	And blessing, he blessed you	1	Yahweh is repeating the verb **bless** in order to intensify the idea that it expresses. If your language can repeat words for intensification, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. If not, your language may have another way of expressing the emphasis. Alternate translation: “And he greatly blessed you”
980	24:12	s9sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	not by your sword and not by your bow	1	Yahweh is using two specific weapons to mean all of the weapons that the Israelites possessed and used. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not by your own weapons”
981	24:12	l1tw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	not by your sword and not by your bow	1	Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “This was not by your sword and not by your bow” or “This was not because you used your own weapons”
982	24:13	m2ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	You {are} eating vineyards and olive groves	1	Yahweh is using the term **vineyards** and **olive groves** by association to mean the fruit that they produce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are eating grapes from vineyards and olives from groves”
983	24:15	m3vy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	in your eyes	1	Joshua is using the term **eyes** by association to mean sight. Sight, in turn, represents judgment and perspective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your judgment”
984	24:15	m4wz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and my house	1	Joshua is using the term **house** by association to mean his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and my family”
985	24:16	i5xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Profane to us from leaving Yahweh	1	See how you translated the same expression in [22:29](../22/29.md). Alternate translation: “God forbid that we should leave Yahweh”
986	24:17	m6yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	from the house of slaves	1	The people are speaking of Egypt as if it were a **house** in which they were kept as **slaves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “where we were slaves”
987	24:17	s7zc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	to our eyes	1	The people are using one part of themselves, their **eyes**, to mean all of them in the act of seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as we watched”
988	24:19	m8ad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	He will not lift your transgressions and your sins	1	Joshua is speaking as if **transgressions** and **sins** were objects that could be **lifted** away from someone. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He will not forgive your transgressions and your sins”
989	24:19	d9be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	your transgressions and your sins	1	The terms **transgressions** and **sins** mean similar things. Joshua is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “your serious sins”
990	24:22	l1cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Witnesses	1	The people are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We are witnesses”
991	24:23	m2dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	stretch out your heart	1	Joshua is speaking as if a person’s **heart** were something that he could **stretch out** toward someone. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give your complete devotion”
992	24:24	m3eh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	and we will listen to his voice	1	The people are using the term **voice** by association to mean the commands that Yahweh would give by using his voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and we will obey his commands”
993	24:25	d4fi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	a statute and a judgment	1	The terms **statute** and **judgment** mean similar things. The author is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “a binding requirement”
994	24:27	p5gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	for it has heard	1	Joshua is speaking of the **stone** as if it were a living thing that had **heard** what the people promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for it was in this place, where this stone is, where we heard”
995	24:27	e6hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	all of the words of Yahweh that he spoke to us	1	While Joshua says that it was **Yahweh** who **spoke** these **words**, he means implicitly that he spoke them himself on behalf of Yahweh. You could indicate this explicitly in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “all of the words that I have spoken to you on behalf of Yahweh”
996	24:28	g7il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	a man to his inheritance	1	Here the masculine term **man** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use language in your translation that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “each person to his or her own home”
997	24:29	i8jm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	a son of 110 years	1	The author is using a common expression of his culture to state someone’s age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when he was 110 years old”
998	24:30	m9kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	in the border of his inheritance	1	The author is using the term **border** by association to mean the territory that the border encloses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “within the territory that belonged to him”
999	24:30	i1lp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	from the north to Mount Gaash	1	As he does in Chapters 13–21, the author is describing the position of one location relative to another in the way that is characteristic of his culture. Translate this the way you translated descriptions of relative locations in those chapters. Alternate translation: “on the north side of Mount Gaash”
1000	24:31	m2mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	all of the days of Joshua and all of the days of the elders	1	The author is using the term **days** by association to mean specific periods of time, the lifetimes of **Joshua** and these **elders**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout Joshua’s lifetime and throughout the lifetimes of the elders”
1001	24:31	i3nr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	who lengthened days after Joshua	1	The author is using a common expression to mean that these elders remained alive for some time after Joshua died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who outlived Joshua”
1002	24:32	b4ps		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight	for 100 qesitah	1	A **qesitah** was a unit of precious metal whose weight is no longer known. You could try to estimate its value in terms of modern currency, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since such values can change over time. So you may wish to use a general expression instead. Alternate translation: “100 pieces of silver”